Home
Instruction Manual
Contents
1. 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 10 y codes Link Functions Incre Change pata Default Referto Code Name Data setting range Unit when ment copying setting page running yO1 RS 485 Communication Standard 1 to 255 Station address 1 N Y 1 yo2 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alam amp Y Y 0 1 Trip with alam amp after running for the period specified by timer y03 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 lf the retry fails trip with alam amp If it succeeds continue to run 3 _ Continue to run yo Timer 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 s Y Y 2 0 yo4 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps yos Data length 0 8 bits Y Y 0 1 7
2. Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing Ti Cp F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high 5 15 F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 FO6 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power E Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter
3. Motor parameter Rated capacity Motor parameter Rated current Rated current of applicable motor 0 Motor characteristics 0 Bechet Fuji standard 8 series motors System design values For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your system design values If the set time is short the inverter may Deceleration time 1 not start running the motor Maximum frequency 60 0 Hz Acceleration time 1 In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for Ciip auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiter automatic deceleration auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure set forth below The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter Acodes are used to specify the data for motor 2 Use them if necessary lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Referring to the rating plate on the motor set the following function codes to their nominal ratings e F04 and A02 Base frequency F05 and A03 Rated voltage at base frequency e
4. Check circuits wires hooking terminals 13 and 11 gt Remove all the parts causing the short circuit The LED displays the alarm What to Check and Suggested Measures This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm Use this to check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence gt To escape from this alarm state press the key 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar has appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Any of PID commands Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is and their feedback not set to 10 PID commana or 12 PID feedback amount related functions is gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 disabled Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount PID control is still in effect or JO1 is not set to 0 gt Set J01 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation or 2 Enable Process control inverse operation 2 Connection to the Prior to proceed check that pressing the Gs key does not take keypad was in poor effect for the LED display connection Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ____ under bar appears Problem Anunderbar ____ appeared on the LED monitor when you pres
5. 1 5 1 5 kW 2 Three phase 200 V 2 2 2 2 kW 4 Three phase 400 V 3 7 3 7 kW if Single phase 200 V 5 5 5 5 kW Code Enclosure 75 7 5 kW S Standard IP20 1 11 kW Code Development code 15 15 kW 1 The nominal applied motor rating of Code Applicable area FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU E High performance Compact is 4 0 kW SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH single phase 1PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current overload capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 37 kW or above SER No Product number 6Z3710K1208 Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Cooling fans Control circuit terminal block Main nameplate Main circuit terminal block cover Main circuit terminal block Terminal cover fastening screw Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters FRN15E1S 20 Terminal cover 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC Multi A WARNING Warning plate RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK SUN BROSEN
6. Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Ti This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations QJ This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information ix Table of Content Preface m Safety precautions m Precautions for use How this manual is organized Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection z 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 3 Transportation 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage 1 4 2 Long term storage Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment 2 2 Installing the Inverter 2 3 Wiring 7 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications Recommended wire sizes Wiring precautions Wiring for main circuit te
7. Insert the main circuit terminal block cover by fitting the part labeled GUIDE according to the guide on the inverter Push where PUSH are labeled to snap it into the inverter Figure 2 8 Mounting the Main Circuit Terminal Block Cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW 2 6 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main circuit terminals Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power somna Terminal Tightening Ground Tightening supply si Inverter type screw torque ing screw torque Refer to voltage kW size N m size N m 0 1 FRNO 1E1S 20 0 2 FRNO 2E1S 20 M3 5 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Figure A 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 20 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 20 Three 1 5 FRN1 5E1S 20 phase 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 20 M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 200V 137 FRN3 7E18 20 5 5 FRN5 5E1S 20 M5 3 8 M5 3 8 7 5 FRN7 5E1S 20 Figure C 11 FRN11E1S 20 M6 5 8 M6 5 8 15 FRN15E1S 20 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 40 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 40 13 IK ERNI SEIS M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 40 Three
8. Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communica tions error Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b option errors Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number of RS 485 errors option Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS 485 communication since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communication s error option Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Option s ROM version Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code Cumulative motor run time Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor ip The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ 47 7 above 3 24 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 A
9. 0 Time The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output terminal Y1 Y2 or 30A B C to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with function code E20 E21 or E27 5 55 HO6 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started HO6 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acc
10. Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat 1 Hearing and visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities Ventilation path Check the heat sink intake and exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials Visual inspection No abnormalities If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum cleaner 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Each part of the product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified below When the replacement is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Note These replacement intervals are based on the estimated service life of the inverter at an ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may need to be reduced Standard replacement intervals mentioned above is only
11. Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur Table 2 9 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise 2 15 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Functions Classifi cation Power Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer supply Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ for the potentio meter The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting voltage vorge 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation P 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the current larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Note Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting
12. Running Running status in hexadecimal format status Refer to ml Displaying running status on the next page F 120 Motor speed Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code POT For motor 2 read P01 as A15 oe Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 spee bs The 7 segment letters 3 appear for 10000 r min or more If Line speed E appear decrease function code E50 data so that the LED monitor displays 9999 or below referring to the above equation PID command Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to amount be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Torque limit value Level 1 Torque limit value Level 2 Driving torque limit value based on motor rated torque Braking torque limit value based on motor rated torque E Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned
13. SER Use the A and keys to display I O Checking 4 1 Press the key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g Use the N and v keys to display the desired I O check item then press the D key un i Lii The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4_ 47 or 4_ using the N and O keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 17 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 18 5 Press the key to return to a list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu LED monitor shows Table 3 16 I O Check Items I O signals on the control circuit terminals Description Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communications control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals and m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA Output voltage to analog meters
14. When the keypad is in use for specifying the frequency settings or driving the motor do not disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running Doing so may stop the inverter Note 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 9 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed 3 11 Table 3 9 Menus Available in Programming Mode Quick Setup Main functions Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation Section 3 4 1 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function Data Setting H codes codes enables High performance functions S data to be Acodes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions o codes Optional function displayed changed Section 3 4 2 Data
15. C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant P01 Motor 1 No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 Motor speed r min No of poles x Frequency Hz P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor When P99 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 HP When P99 1 P03 Motor 1 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when
16. H51 Torque boost 1 F09 i Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 5 19 e Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor Zn Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base note frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the in
17. Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned ON 18 7 Tuning error Problem Possible Causes 1 Aphase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor Auto tuning failed Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period H96 gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E05 on terminals X1 through X5 What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set BS Check whether the data of function codes agrees with the specifications of the motor Motor 1 F04 F05 H50 through H53 P02 and P03 Motor 2 A02 A03 A16 and A17 The connection length between the inverter and the motor was too long Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the motor is not exceeding 50 m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the connection wire length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 6 20 Possible Causes 4 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter What t
18. _ Rated capacity kVA 2 11 19 28 41 68 99 83 18 22 _Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function i Rated current A a 1 25 37 ss 90 18 24 30 a Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 0 5 s _ Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz _Voltago froquoncy variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 9 Frequency 5 to 5 with DCR 0 85 16 30 44 73 106 144 211 28 8 2 Rated current A T i i T T f E withoutOCR 17 31 s9 82 130 173 232 33 0 43 8 Required power supply capacity kVA 6 oo 11 20 29 49 74 190 1 20 Torque 7 100 70 40 20 Torque 8 150 3 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards ULS08C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 1P20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 1 1 12 17 17 23 34 36 61 TA 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 KHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that th
19. together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screws from terminals P1 and P together with the jumper bar 2 Put the wire from terminal P of the braking resistor and the jumper bar on terminal P in this order then secure them with the screw removed in 1 above 3 Tighten the screw on terminal P1 4 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to the DB of the inverter Figure 2 10 Braking Resistor Connection without DC Reactor DCR When connecting a DC reactor DCR together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screw from terminal P 2 Overlap the DC reactor DCR wire and braking resistor wire P as shown at left and then secure them to terminal P of the inverter with the screw 3 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to terminal DB of the inverter 4 Do not use the jumper bar Figure 2 11 Braking Resistor Connection with DC Reactor DCR DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters Note Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used 2 14 Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input or L1 L and L2 N single phase input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main cir
20. use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on Cote At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency Frequency saved in internal memory Output frequency Run 1 command UP iri terminal command fo Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command source Other than UP DOWN F01 C30 Switching command Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Initial frequency for UP DOWN control H61 0 H61 1 Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching PID conditioner Cancel PID control Hz PID Reference frequency given by PID control PID controller output Multi frequency Select multi frequency SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Communications link Cote To
21. 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Cumulative run time When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 No of startups is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit voltage Unit V volts 3 26 LED monitor shows item No Table 3 21 Continued Item displayed Max temperature of heat sink Description Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5
22. 0 to 15 steps SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others For details refer to the block diagram in FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Selected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 C08 Multi frequency 4 C09 Multi frequency 5 C10 Multi frequency 6 i frequency 7 i frequency 8 i frequency 9 i frequency 10 i frequency 11 i frequency 12 i frequency 14 i frequency 13 i frequency 15 E Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RT1 command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by defa
23. 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output DOWN frequency 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation UVS 24 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 25 1025 Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor STM speed at starting 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 42 1042 Reserved 2 43 1043 Reserved 2 44 1044 Reserved 2 45 1045 Reserved 2 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively C codes Control Functions Incre Data Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Unit ment copying setting page C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y 0 00 co2 4 Y 0 00 c03 3 yY 0 00 C04 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 30 0 0 1 Hz y 3 0 CO5_ Multi Frequency 1 10 00 to 400 0 0 01 Hz y 0 00 C06 2 Y 0 00 C07 3 y 0 00 cos 4 Y 0 00 cog 5 Y 0 00 C10 6 y 0 00 C11 T 0 00 C12 8 y 0 00 C13 9 Y 0 00 C14 10 Y 0 00 C15 11 Y 0 00 C16 12 Y 0 00 C17 13 Y 0 00 C18 14 y 0 00 C19 15 y 0 00 C20 _ Joggin
24. CMY SOURCE input a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 19 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit 2 20 Table 2 9 Continued Functions Classifi cation S0A B Alarm Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been C relay activated to stop the motor output Contact rating for any 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A error Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 and Y2 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Between terminals 30A and 30C is closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Between terminals 30A and 30C is open non excited for ON signal output Active OFF Relay output RJ 45 Standard Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter supplies connect RJ 45 the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The or for connector extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to the these pins for supplying the keypad power keypad Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches for setting of the terminating resistor Commun
25. Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 6 5 Possible Causes 3 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay has a contact problem replace the relay 4 The connection Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation between the inverter is enabled ee motor wasitoo gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Enable load selection for higher startup torque F37 A13 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wire as short as possible 5 The inverter output is Once cancel all the automatic control systems auto torque boost hunting due to vibration auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current caused by low stiffness limiter torque limiter regenerative energy suppression auto search of the load Or the for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control current is irregularly and droop control overload stop function then check that the motor oscillating due to special vibration comes to a stop motor parameters gt Cancel the
26. F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TL2 TL1 terminal command is assigned torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 takes effect by default Input terminal command TL2 TL1 Torque limiter level OFF Torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 ON Torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency 5 41 The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on
27. Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the mode The alarm can be removed using the i 5 key to release the alarm and return to Running key only when the alarm code is displayed m Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the V key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 27 m Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the A X 1O key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 21 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the 5 key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this t
28. T 2 2 Q Programmable logic controller QO Programmable TE lt Control circuit gt C Erarammane Y lt Control circuit gt Pc sink J 24 VOC SOURCE T x1 to pes X1 to X5 FWD REV focoup FWD REV Photocoupler 1 0 icy cM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 17 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 18 Classifi cation Analog output Analog monitor FMA function Table 2 9 Continued Functions The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V is output You can select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation Output frequency 2 After slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV e PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV Input impedance of external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capab
29. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation E Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern m Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Note e If FO5 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through Note H53 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect Examples E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with two non linear points Output voltage V
30. To enable the PID process command to be modified with the S key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the AY key to display the PID process command The lowest digit and its decimal point blink on the LED monitor 4 To change the PID process command press the N Y key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the via keypad PID process command Also it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered on Tio e Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID process command SS4 or SS8 ON you Cie still can set the process command using the keypad e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the N Y key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID process command currently selected while you cannot change the setting e On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed HEL 4 Decimal point Table 3 4 PID process Command Manually Set with AIP Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote LE
31. appears E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ i 7 ina part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing Note be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 function E59 defines the property of terminal C1 for either a current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function or a voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function In addition to this setting you need to turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position Current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function C1 Voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function v2 5 48 E61 E62 E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function E61 E62 and E63 define the property of terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E61 E62 or E63 Function Description 0 None Auxiliary frequency command 1 Thi
32. e g fH In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history Each time the A or Q key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recentoneas c 7 and While the alarm code is displayed press the key to have the corresponding alarm item number e g 5_4i1 and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of approximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g 5_ 7 and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the N and V keys Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the Att key again to return to the menu Table 3 21 Alarm Information Displayed ED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No cm Lii Output frequency Output frequency 51 Output current Output current cma 6c Output voltage Output voltage as Calculated Lid torque Calculated motor output torque core Reference Qr frequency Frequency specified by frequency command Rotational This shows the rotational direction being output f y om FET direction F forward reverse D This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to E IIE j aia Running status E Displaying running status in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit thousands of hours A Display range
33. example Preparation e Set E43 data to 13 LED monitor to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set C21 to 1 Enable timer operation e Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the amp 5 key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the D key 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the MAV key to set the timer for the desired count in seconds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the D key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops without pressing the amp key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible Note After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as Xo FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays Ene and any LED monitor item for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item C31 C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset and Filter time constant C36 C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset and Filter time constant C41 C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset and Filter time constant
34. of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was inadequate Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Reconsider the data of function code H27 A PTC thermistor and pull up resistor were connected incorrectly or the resistance was Check the connection and the resistance of the pull up resistor gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an appropriate resistance inadequate Possible Causes 6 The value set for the torque boost F09 and A05 was too high What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F09 and A05 and readjust the data so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data to a lower value gt Readijust the data of the function codes F09 and A05 7 The V f pattern did not match the motor Check if the base frequency F04 and A02 and rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 match the values on the nameplate on the motor gt Match the function code data to the values on the nameplate of the motor 8 Wrong settings Although no PTC thermistor is used the thermistor H26 is active gt Set H26 Thermistor Mode selection to 0 Disable 9 oH Braking resistor overheated Problem Possible Causes 1 Braking load is too heavy The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Recons
35. set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display Maintenance Information S A 3 Press the S key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ L47 4 Use the AN and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the x key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the amp key again to return to the menu LED Monitor shows Table 3 20 Display Items for Maintenance Information Cumulative run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature of Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Unit C Temperature
36. 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 0 1 6 0 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 0 T 0 0 1 1 1 23 1 0 1 1 1 8 0 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 1 0 26 1 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 1 27 1 1 0 1 1 12 0 1 1 0 0 28 1 1 1 0 0 13 0 1 1 0 1 29 1 1 1 0 1 14 0 1 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 1 0 15 0 1 1 1 1 31 1 1 1 1 1 Overload Stop J63 to J67 Detection value Detection level Mode selection Operation condition and Timer When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for the period specified by J67 the inverter activates the overload stop function according to operation specified by J65 Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper E Detection value J63 J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored Data for J63 Detection value Description To improve the accuracy of torque calculation be sure to Output torque auto tune the inverter for the applied motor This setting covers the driving torque only The no load current to the motor always flows Specify J64 Output current Detection level correctly considering the no load current of the applied motor E Detection level J64 J64 specifies the detection level putting
37. 2 Full menu mode Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is as same as its of Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 Ti To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code IP E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 12 Figure 3 4 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON ae Running mode A ey T Programming gt _mode_ aF List of monitoring items Running status info A T T 3 OLIO S Output frequency 1 nn a gt n i 3oPE r 3 80 K as 3 50 Before slip caudscdweaseo 4 E DITO e comp
38. 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 2 3 4 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or connect the single phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 L and L2 N of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring Secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the devices recommended ones within the related current range e Use wires in th
39. Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Multiple alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details under communications control in hexadecimal format Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor
40. Conversion Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal ojojojojojojojo lolo lalo oj oj oj o lolololo alalolol i l 616 joj o gt oj gt j o 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 16 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 5 Programming i mode O Fre ALTO O List of I O check items VO data AA SH are DE By LED segment ON OFF 410 H gt 400 k W O status in binary format at ole 00935 Input status in hex format AJTO OOO Output status in hex format uo By LED segment ON OFF xd 2 VO status in binary format Oto 3355 Input status in hex format OOO Output status in hex format o hl 5 2 Input voltage at terminal 12 V S PG pulse rate 2 Z phase 4 nn sis 50 8 pis Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the SS key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears
41. FM Shows the output voltage on terminal FM in volts V Pulse rate of FM Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FM in pulses per second p s Input voltage on terminal C1 Shows the input voltage on terminal C1 V2 function assigned in volts V Option control circuit terminal 1 0 Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on the optional DI O interface card Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DI O interface card on page 3 22 for details PG pulse rate 1 A B phase Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s in quad frequency when the PG interface is installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 1 Z phase Shows the pulse rate p s in Z phase when the PG interface is installed PG pulse rate 2 A B phase Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s of the second PG in quad frequency when two PG interfaces are installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Shows the second PG pulse rate p s in Z phase when two PG interfaces are installed Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminal may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 17 and the figure below each of segments a to g on LED1 lights when the corresponding digital
42. P02 and A16 Rated capacity e P03 and A17 Rated current 4 2 2 Selection of tuning process Check the situation of the machine system and choose between Tuning while the motor is stopped P04 or A18 1 and Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Data for P04 A18 Motor parameters subject to tuning Primary resistance R1 Leakage reactance X Action Measure R1 and X while the motor is stopped Choose the process when The motor cannot be rotated or more than 50 of the rated load would be applied on the motor if rotated Primary resistance R1 Leakage reactance X No load current Rated slip frequency Measure R1 and X while the motor is stopped later no load current while the motor is running At 50 of the base frequency Lastly measure rated slip frequency while the motor Even if the motor is rotated it is safe and the load applied on the motor would be no more than 50 of the rating If you do the tuning with no load you will get the highest precision is stopped Upon completion of the tuning each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the applicable function code 3 Preparation of mac
43. Possible Causes 1 Wiring has been connected to the motor incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the respective U V and W terminals of the motor Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV BS Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection S The setting for the rotation direction via keypad operation is incorrect Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 fun fo keys on keypad forward or 3 un Gr0e keys on keypad reverse 4 Ifthe speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command 2 The external frequency command device was used Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal
44. Table 2 11 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit Decrease the carrier frequency breaker that is connected to Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter Hi ae primary has Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that has a longer sensitive pped current than one currently being used Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay Decrease the carrier frequency was activated Increase the settling current of the thermal relay Use the electronic thermal relay built in the inverter instead of an external thermal relay 2 27 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad 7 segment LED As shown at the right the keypad monitor consists of a four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED indicators LED indicators The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor monitor running status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the Program function code data monitor I O signal Reset key RUN key states maintenance information and RUN LED alarm information Function Data key A Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Keys and LED Functions Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes LED m In Run
45. These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at al times Application AWARNING e FRENIC Multi is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur e FRENIC Multi may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though FRENIC Multi is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries e Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Do not get on a shipping box e Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause
46. Zn To switch the inverter s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 F40 F41 and C Tip torque limiter 2 E16 E17 use the terminal command TL2 TL1 assigned to a digital input terminal Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 5 31 The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are Note activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F42 Control Mode Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode V f control with slip compensation active Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface E V f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes E Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the sli
47. alarm on the LED monitor and issues alarm output ALM to the digital output terminal specified see E20 E21 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of m key N key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as for data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running of the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of sre key key For details refer to the description of H97 H69 Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or brake unit if regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration deceleration and constant speed running phases Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 Th
48. alarm 0 Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch J12 Upper level alarm AH 100 to 100 100 J13 Lower level alam AL 100 to 100 0 J18 Upper limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 299 Disable J19 Lower limit of PID process output 999 J56 Speed command filter 0 10 J57 Dancer reference position 0 J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant 0 position deviation 1 to 100 J59 P Gain 2 0 100 J60 1 Integral time 2 0 0 J61 D Differential time 2 0 00 to 600 00 1 0 00 J62 PID control block selection Bit 0 PID output pole 0 0 addition 1 subtraction Bit 1 Select compensation of output ratio 0 speed command 1 ratio J63 Overload Stop 0 Torque 0 5 65 Detection value _1 Curent J64 Detection level 100 J65 Mode selection 0 Decelerate to stop Coast to a stop Hit mechanical stop J66 Operation condition 0 Enable at constant speed and during deceleration 0 Enable at constant speed Enable anytime J67 Timer J68 Braking Signal 100 5 66 Brake OFF current J69 Brake OFF frequency J70 Brake OFF timer J71 Brake ON frequency J72 Brake ON timer J73 _ Resered 2 J74 375 J76 377 J78 J79 J80 J81 J82 J83 J84 J85 J86 0 Manual mode 1 Auto mode
49. appears 3 14 5 Change the function code data using the and keys In this example press the A key two times to change data to Press the G5 key to establish the function code data The SALE appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example F fic Pressing the eS key instead of the S key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the S key for 1 second or longer i in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement 6 Tip Power ON List of function codes Function code data 4 J fat ey Save data and go to the next function code Figure 3 3 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or
50. bits yo6 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU Y Y 0 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU yo7 Stop bits 0 2 bits Y Y 0 1 1 bit yos No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 s Y Y 0 1 to 60 yoo Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 01 y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 1 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y11 RS 485 Communication Option 1 to 255 Station address 1 N y 1 yt2 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm E P Y v 0 1 Trip with alam amp after running for the period specified by timer y13 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alam amp If it succeeds continue to run 3 _Continue to run yi3 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 s Y Y 2 0 yi4 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps yi5 Data length 0 8 bits Y Y 0 1 7 bits yi6 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU Y Y 0 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU yi7 Stop bits 0 2 bits Y Y 0 1 1 bit yi8 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 s Y Y 0 1 to 60 y19 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 01 y20 Protocol sel
51. by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 5 44 Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque is the driving one and it goes ON when it is the braking one Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Current limiting by software F43 and F44 e Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 Overload stop Hit mechanical stop J65 3 i Note When the OL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have AO deviated
52. capacity 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter instead of three phase voltage input ponm Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power FRENIC Multi of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power supply Note You can disable input phase loss protection using the function code H98 Protection Maintenance Function 5 G amp Output phase loss Problem Possible Causes Output phase loss occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Inverter output wires are broken Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires 2 Wires for motor winding are broken Measure the output current gt Replace the motor 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 4 Asingle phase motor has been connected gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Multi only drives three phase induction motors 6 GH Heat sink overheat Problem Possible Causes Temperature around heat sink rose What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the inverter inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel well 2 A
53. configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected Not phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Output phase loss protection 4 47 Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm F Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice Cote Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the L reference level in advance Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid suc
54. current current 4to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation input 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation C1 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal function 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 2509 Maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting voltage voltage Oto 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation input 10 to 0 VDC O to 100 Inverse operation v2 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal function 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22 kQ Maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC PTC 1 Connects PTC Positive 113 lt Control circuit gt thermistor Temperature 10 VDC input Coefficient thermistor Resistor Operation level PTC for motor protection Ae Ras function The figure shown below et gt comparator gt illustrates the internal j 7 mtema circuit diagram To use thermistor ee the PTC thermistor you must change data of the function code H26 ics 5 a D 2 m lt Figure 2 12 Internal Circuit Diagram The C1 function V
55. current of the inverter for 100 200 F50 F51 for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Allowable average loss Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 to 900 1999 Disable 0 Reserved 999 10 001 to 50 000 10 000 Reserved 5 2 0 000 5 33 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Incre Change pata Default Reterto Code Name Data setting range unit when ment copying setting page 01 Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to Y 0 5 35 terminals X1 to X5 as listed below E02_ Terminal X2 Function 0 1000 Select multi frequency ss7 Y 1 E03_ Terminal X3 Function 1 1001 Select multi frequency ss2 Y 2 E04_ Terminal X4 Function 2 1002 Select multi frequency ssa Y 7 E05_ Terminal X5 Function 3 1003 Select multi frequency ssa Y 8 4 1004 Select ACCIDEC time ATH 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 11 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 12 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK 14 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency Down 19 1019 Enable data
56. end user s installation is different from the initial measuring method at the time of factory shipment the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors can not be measured Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end User s installation Besos tee eae Procedure for setting up measurement condition 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm th
57. f the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a erminating device turn SW3 to ON Switches the output mode of the output terminal FM between analog voltage and pulse output When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 SW6 Data for F29 Analog voltage output FMA 0 Factory default Current output FMP Switches property of the input terminal C1 for C1 V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code E59 and H26 Data for Data for SW7 Sw8 E59 H26 Analog frequency setting in current Factory default Ga QER o g Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF 1 0 PTC thermistor input C1 ON 2 22 Figure 2 22 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example Factory default SW7 SHE Swe FMAFWPL Ci V2 IOFF ON Factory default Figure 2 22 Location of the Slide Switches 2 23 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 1 Mounting style You can mount a keypad in any style described below Mounting a keypad on the panel wall Refer to Figure 2 23 Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Refer
58. for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command off In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will
59. from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated m Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Function code data 21 This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque limiting and the reference
60. injuries Wiring A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the recommended current range e Use wires in the specified size When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output Secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire e Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur e Qualified electricians should carry out wiring e Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur e Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur A WARNING Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Do not ins
61. injuries could occur Others A WARNING Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation E Precautions for use In running general purpose motors Driving a 400 V general purpose motor When driving a 400V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation Torque characteristics and temperature rise When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof
62. input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or X5 is closed it goes off when it is open Segment a and b on LEDS light when the circuit between output terminal Y1 or Y2 and terminal CMY and do not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C Segment a on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open C Tip If all terminal input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LED1 to LED4 will blink Table 3 17 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment 30A B C Th No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 18 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits 7 to each With the FRENIC Multi digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit O and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to 0 when it
63. inverter s Magnetic contactor DC Reactor DCR Note When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Figure 2 9 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment 2 11 Grounding terminals G Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Inverter output terminals U V W and grounding terminals G Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the three phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal G Cote e The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m when they AN are connected directly If the wiring length exceeds 50 m an output circuit filter option should be inserted E g total power cable length is 400 m as shown in the figure below Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors even if some possible combinations of inverters and motors are considered No
64. is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are on short circuited and all the others are off open 77 5 is displayed on LED4 to LED1 Digital output terminal Y1 and Y2 are assigned to bits 0 and 1 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is on Y2 is off and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 7 7 is displayed on the LED4 to LED1 Table 3 18 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED 3 21 Table 3 18 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Formai LED No Bit 8 Input E terminal Output E p _ F 30 terminal A B C Binary 0 0 0 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 LED3 LED2 LEDI No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communi
65. keypad Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter including voltage current and input power as well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode Equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC Multi inverter to another Extension cable for remote keypad operation The extension cable connects the RS 485 communications port standard with a keypad or an RS 485 USB converter Three lengths are available 5 m 3 m and 1 m RS 485 Communications card This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy Option This has a pair of RJ 45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration without using a branch adapter RS 485 USB converter A converter that allows connection of an RS 485 communications port to a USB port on a PC Inverter support loader software Inverter support loader software Windows GUI Graphics User Interface based that makes setting of function codes easy Other peripheral equipment Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers and protects the inverter from malfunctioning Surge killers Asurge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverte
66. not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the S key If you press the S key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and v keys the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible a m Copying data The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters The standard keypad does not support this feature The optional multi function keypad supports it with Menu 8 in Programming mode If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation ei
67. output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 E Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Data for H95 Characteristics Slow response Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may the current thereby preventing reverse result at the start of DC braking rotation at the start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby accelerating depending on the moment of the build up of the braking torque inertia of the mechanical load and the coupling mechanism Tio It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking C Tip terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque 5 28 n general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip note frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not
68. overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent baisen reer high frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance in and motor the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is 6r shorter than 50 m If this length must be exceeded lower the Wiring carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Wiring size Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the 9 current value or recommended wire size When several inverters drive motors do not use one Wiring type multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor a rating listed in the standard specifications table for the ong inverter e eneral purpose Selecting Fier oe When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or inverter deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank capacity larger capacity than the standard Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current Transpor When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations tation and that meet the environmental conditions listed in Chapter 1 Section 1 3 storage Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment viii How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 9 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVER
69. panel well 2 The torque boost setting F09 and A05 was too high Check the setting of FO9 and A05 Torque Boost and make sure that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall gt Adjust the setting of F09 and A05 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Recalculate the required acceleration deceleration torque and time from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 4 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload prevention control H70 5 Air vent is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 6 17 Possible Causes 6 The service life of the cooling fan has expired or the cooling fan malfunctioned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan The wire
70. storm or flood lightening excessive voltage or other types of disaster or secondary disasters 7 9 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN___E1S 29 01 02 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 1 15 Nominal applied motor kW o1 02 04 ors 15 22 37 55 75 n 15 Rated capacity kVA 2 030 os 1 1 19 30 41 64 as 2 17 22 amp Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function i 08 15 3 0 5 0 8 0 17 25 33 47 60 Rated current A 4 on 14 25 4 2 7 0 10 165 235 e 44 57 Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 0 5 s Rated trequency Hz S0e0RE 7 Phases voltage frequency Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 4 Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 9 Frequency 5 to 5 S rated ouent a wg ocr 0 57 093 16 30 57 83 140 211 288 422 576 without OCR 11 18 31 53 95 132 222 315 427 607 801 Required power supply capacity kva 6 02 03 06 11 20 29 49 74 10 15 20 Torque 7 150 100 70 40 20 E Torque 8 150 3 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current l Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 1P20 UL open type OOO
71. that of the specifications 6 11 Possible Causes 2 Asurge current entered the input power supply What to Check and Suggested Measures If within the same power supply a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor 3 The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 and H56 gt Enable the regenerative braking H69 2 4 or automatic deceleration H71 1 gt Enable torque limiter F41 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability 4 The acceleration time was too short Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 and E10 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 5 Braking load was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability 6 Malfunction caused by noise 3 4 Undervoltage Problem Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level whe
72. the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance 6 6 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time Possible Causes 1 The inverter ran the motor by S curve or curvilinear pattern What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 2 The current limiting prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable gt Readijust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter in F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 The automatic regenerative braking was active S Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 and E11 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In the case of a fan or a pump load lower the setting data of the F15 Frequency limiter High I
73. the cable for cracks and discoloration 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal block Check that the terminals are not damaged Visual inspection No abnormalities DC link bus capacitor Main circuit 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the case 2 Check if the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Measure discharge time with capacitance probe 1 2 No abnormalities 3 The discharge time is not shorter than time specified by the replacement manual Transformer and reactor Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor Hearing visual and smelling inspection No abnormalities Magnetic contactor and relay 1 Check for chatters during operation 2 Check for rough contacts 7 2 1 Hearing inspection 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Control circuit Check part Printed circuit board Table 7 1 Continued Check item 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation How to inspect 1 Retighten 2 Smelling and visual inspection 3 4 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities Cooling system
74. the rated torque and current of the motor as 100 5 65 E Mode selection J65 J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64 Data for J65 Description Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function Decelerate to The inverter decelerate to stops the motor by the specified stop deceleration time The inverter shuts down the output immediately and the Goast iaistop motor coast to stops The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit operation and is controlling the output current to keep the Mechanical hold toque until the run command turned OFF Make the stopper mechanical brake turn on before turning the run command iFinverter issues an alarm IOL or IOL2 during the mechanical stopper operation Cote Once the overload stop function is activated the inverter holds it and cannot Pia accelerate the motor again To reaccelerate the motor turn the run command OFF and ON again e If J65 3 the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified E Operation condition J66 J66 specifies the inverter s operation state to apply the overload stop function Note that carefully specify it so as not to induce a malfunction by any setting that is not needed Data for J66 Applicable operation mode Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation mode Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode Takes ef
75. this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Multi Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 e RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may A WARN N G lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may CAUT O N lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences
76. to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 A The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any Note base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Braking time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning off the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking E Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated
77. to Figure 2 24 Remote operation extension cable Keypad Keypad fixing screw Kb Inverter YY Figure 2 23 Mounting Keypad on the Panel Wall Remote operation extension cable Inverter Figure 2 24 Installing Keypad at a Remote Site e g for Operation on Hand 2 24 2 Parts needed for connection To mount install a keypad on a place other than an inverter parts listed below are needed Parts name Remarks Extension cable Note CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 cables available in length of 5m 3m and 1m Fixing screw M3 x 16 Accessories Keypad rear cover Accessories Note When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant to US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer SANWA Supply Co LTD Model KB 10T5 01K 1m KB STP 01K 1m Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps m Mounting a keypad on the panel wall Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hooks on the keypad Figure 2 25 Removing a Keypad Fix the keypad rear cover to the keypad Keypad rear cover Figure 2 26 Fixing the Keypad Rear Cover for Remote Keypad Operation 2 25 Make a cut out on the panel wall For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad To mount the keypad on the panel fix it firmly using a pair of M3 screws put through the taps shown below
78. to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Enable restart After a momentary power failure restoring power and Restart at the starting then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the frequency for starting frequency specified by function code F23 low inertia load This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Tin When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can Qe apply which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without stopping it Refer to H09 A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 5 23 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough
79. until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors E Auto restart after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Inverter capacity kW Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 0 1 to 7 5 0 5 11 to 15 1 0 E Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentar
80. value obtained from the motor manufacturer Em R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression R1 Cable R1 V 43x1 R1 x100 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A m X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X14 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X AX VI x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A E Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Rated slip frequency Hz Synchronous speed x Base frequency Cote For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving P10 Slip compensation response time P11 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessi
81. 00 V FRNO 75E1S 70 133 20 FRNT SEIS 72 0B2 2 20 40 55 ie 0 110 Me FRN2 2E1S 70 50 10 i The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function E98 E99 Terminal FWD and REV Function Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON i CAU T O N In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g SS1 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result 5 35 Function code data Active ON Active OFF 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 Enable external alarm trip THR
82. 1 20 35 64 16 17 5 z Rated current A 5 t t f t S without DCR 18 33 54 9 7 164 248 Required power supply capacity KVA 6 03 04 a 13 24 35 Torque 7 150 100 z 40 E Torque 8 150 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s l Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards ULS08C C22 2 No 14 ENS0178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 06 06 0 7 09 18 24 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 KHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the
83. 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals 80A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched on and off at one second intervals Cote e When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be Note 5 43 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 Inverter running RUN 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 1002 Frequency detected FDT 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 1004 Torque polarity detected B D 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 1026 Auto resetting TRY 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RU
84. 1 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode 3 3 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode in which you can Monitor the running status e g output frequency and output current Configure the reference frequency and other settings 1 2 3 Run stop the motor and 4 Jog inch the motor 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned on the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the Gs between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the Gs Monitor of running status in Running mode in Figure 3 1 Display sample on the LED monitor 1 Monitor items Table 3 3 Monitoring Items LED indicator E on O off Unit Meaning of displayed value key to switch key refer to Function code data for E43 Speed monitor and LED in Function code E48 specifies dicators what to be displayed on the LED monitor Output frequency before slip compensation IIIT SOL mHz OA Okw Frequency actually being output Output frequency after slip compensation z OA Okw Frequency actually being output Reference frequency z OA Okw Reference frequency being set Motor speed SHG mHz mA OkW r min Output f eque x ri cy Hz P01 For motor 2 read P01 a
85. 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS Terminal commands assigned Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option 1025 Universal DI U DI 1024 LE 1026 Enab e auto search for idling motor speed at STM starting 30 Force to stop STOP Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Hold PID integral component PID HLD Reserved Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 A Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions Note marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON 5 36 Terminal function assignment and data setting Select multi frequency
86. 2 DC 4 to 20 mA DCO to 10 V FMA 30C x FM 308 Alarm output Meter 30130A for any fault FMP SW6 Fwo Y1 i REV Y2 i Transistor output CM sink CMY i x1 Digital input Pa SOURCE f x3 swi f 7 X4 f q XS MCCB Molded case circuit breaker CM ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker Note 6 MC Magnetic contactor gta DCR DC reactor PLC DBR Braking resistor Note 1 When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Note 2 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 3 Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or ELCB when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 4 THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Note 5 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting a voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 1 to 5
87. 2 function or PTC function can be assigned to terminal C1 Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function code For details refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches Analog Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 and FM common Isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 16 Table 2 9 Continued Functions Classifi cation Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 13 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 14 D
88. 25 VDC Electric shock may occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter operates or while it is turned ON Check if the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check if the surrounding environment satisfies Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection by the following items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor turn OFF the inverter and shut down power supply Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and atmosphere dust gas oil mist or water drops 2 Check if tools or other foreign materials or dangerous objects are left around
89. 37 FRN3 7E1S 40 phase x ri 400 V 4 0 FRN4 0E1S 4E 5 5 FRN5 5E1S 40 M5 3 8 M5 38 7 5 FRN7 5E1S 40 Figure C 11 FRN11E1S 400 M6 5 8 M6 5 8 15 FRN15E1S 40 0 1 FRNO 1E1S 70 Me PRNO 2E rete M3 5 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Figure D Single 94 FRNO 4E18 70 i 3 phase 200 V 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 70 1 5 FRN1 5E1S 70 M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure E 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 70 The capacity of the nominal applied motor of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Figure A MAHAA MARARA 2 The control circuit terminals common to all models EP EPP PPP PPE PPP PTT Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 N m Table 2 5 Control Circuit Terminals Dimension of openings in the control j j circuit terminals for ferrule Wire sinp Jength for Europe type terminal block iH Flat screw driver AWG26 to AWG16 0 6 x 3 5 mm 0 14 to 1 5 mm 2 51 W x 1 76 H mm Manufacturer of ferrules Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to Table 2 6 Screwdriver type Allowable wire size Table 2 6 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Type With insulated collar Without insulated collar Screw size AWG24 0 25 mm Al0 25 6BU AWG22 0 34 mm Al0 34 6TQ 3 5mm 2 EW GIR OZR Al0 75 6GY Head thickness 0 6 mm AWG16 1 25 mm Al1 5 6BK 5 Screwdr
90. 424 Enter Running mode see page 3 3 and press the A keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to Lal again e Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and Tip acceleration deceleration time respectively Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with your needs e Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the AN keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped 2 Jogging the motor Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 9 A keys simultaneously 4 5 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions p Incre Change y Default Referto Code Name Data setting range Unit when ment copying setting page rumning F00 Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection Y 0 513 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protectio
91. A20 A21 and A22 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used 8 The current limiting operation did not increase the output frequency Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter level gt If the current limiting operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 to ensure that the V f pattern is right gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings 6 4 Possible Causes 9 In the toque control mode the output frequency does not increase What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque limit switching signal TL2 TL17 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default gt Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command TL2 TL1 10 Bias and grain set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readijust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command
92. C Multi features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Protective Functions 3 2 Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Running mode Programming mode Power ON Run stop of motor Setting of function codes Monitor of running status Monitor of various inverter status Menu driven S Alarm mode 8 Display of alarm status i Occurence of Pa an alarm 5 T Press these keys if an alarm has occured The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function code E48 Applicable only when PID control is active J01 1 2 or 3 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 Applicable only when the full menu mode is selected E52 2 Figure 3
93. Checking Displays only function codes that have been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Drive Monitoring Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running I O Checking Displays external interface information Maintenance Information Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Alarm Information Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred Note 1 Mounting a multi function keypad adds the data copying function to the menu enabling reading writing and verifying of function code data Note 2 Theo codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option m Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only two menus Menu 0 Quick Setup and Menu 1 Data Setting allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 10 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable Function code data editing mode factory default Menu H De Function code data check mode
94. D monitor Multi frequency selection command SV E43 SS4 SS8 J01 J02 With O O key PID process command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently Other than 0 selected 3 7 Setting up the frequency command with O and Q keys under PID process control When function code F01 is set to 0 V keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the Y keys In Programming or Alarm mode the OUA keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Manual Speed Frequency Command Specified with O Keys and Requirements PID control Communi Mode LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Cancel PID Pressing A selection monitor command 1 frequency frequency link control keys oa E43 F01 SS2 SS1 operation Hz PID y J01 LE OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command 0 OFF OFF OFF Gn Manua
95. E30 fmf mmm m m mm a m m m a m Reference frequency 1 f Reference frequency 1 E30 Reference frequency 2 E30 fJ nthe no m e e m e m Reference frequency 2 Reference frequency 2 E30 Frequency arrival signal FAR ON Frequency arrival 1 Frequency 1 delay time E29 1 arrival delay time E29 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 i ON E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level and Timer E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID and Current detected 2 ID2 output signals E Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code i of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data 7 to any of the digital output terminals E Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When t
96. FO Instruction Manual High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd INR S147 1094 E Copyright 2006 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor for fan and pump applications Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of
97. FWD and REV Run Digital input circuit specifications orward It a em command Control circuit Saves PLC i Operation ON level Run f voltage reverse SINK OFF level Photocoupler command Operation ON level voltage SOURCE OFF level Operation current at X1 to X5 ON FWD REV Input voltage is at 0 V CM Allowable leakage current at OFF Figure 2 15 Table 2 9 Continued Functions Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum 50 mA DC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 Refer to Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals in this Section for more Digital Two common terminals for digital input signal terminals input These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY common m Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 16 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly re
98. Figure 2 27 Tightening torque 0 7 N m Panel wall Keypad fixing screws Figure 2 27 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall Connect an extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S or off the shelf straight LAN cable to RJ 45 connectors Modular jacks on the keypad and inverter standard RS 485 port Refer to Figure 2 28 Penel me RJ 45 connector Modular jack ny To RJ 45 connector on inverter RJ 45 connector Remote operation extension cable CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S or LAN cable Figure 2 28 Connecting a Keypad and an Inverter s Standard RS 485 port m Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Follow the step in Mounting a keypad on the panel wall 2 26 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component which may affect other loads and power factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power supply as the inverter If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter It may also be necessary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor correcting capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other dev
99. Filter time constant 0 05 5 50 C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 1 100 0 5 27 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 10 00 to 100 00 1 0 00 Bias base point C51 Bias PID command 1 100 00 to 100 00 Bias value 0 00 c52 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 00 1 0 00 C53 Selection of Normal Inverse Operation 0 Normal operation 0 Frequency command 1 1 Inverse operation P codes Motor 1 Parameters Change Code Name Data setting range ibe Unit aah a Degut Peene ment copying setting page running P0O1 Motor 1 No of poles 2 to 22 4 5 51 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 Rated 10 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 capacity of motor Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 Rated value of Fuji standard motor Auto tuning Disable 0 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running P05 Online tuning Disable 0 P06 No load current Rated value of Fuji standard motor P07 R1 Rated value of Fuji standard motor Pos X Rated value of Fuji standard motor Pog Slip compensation gain for driving 100 0 5 52 P10 Slip compensation response time 0 50 P11 Slip compensation gain for braking 100 0 P12 Rated slip frequency Rated value 5 51 of Fuji standard motor Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 0 5 52 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 3 Motor
100. Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 a Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vif pattern 1 V f pattern 2 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 F07 Acceleration Time 1 F08 Deceleration Time 1 E10 Acceleration Time 2 E11 Deceleration Time 2 F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 F25 F23 Actual Actual i acc time dec time A f you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration Note deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times Refer to the description of HO7 for details e Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one Acceleration time 1 F07 F08 and deceleration time 1 E10 E11 is switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to
101. Menu 2 Data Checking Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 Pressing the A V key will cycle through the menu With the D key you can select the desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item C Tip 3 12 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Multi Function code group F codes Table 3 11 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Multi Function codes FOO to F51 Function Fundamental functions Description Functions concerning basic motor running E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal functions Functions concerning the assignment of control circuit terminals Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency settings P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteris
102. Mode Auto search 0 Disable TN Y 0 557 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration TY Y 0 559 1 Coast to stop H12 instantaneous Overcurrent 0 Disable v Y 1 Limiting 1 Enable Mode selection H13 Restar Mode after Momentary Power 0 1 to 10 0 oi s Y Y1 Depending 5 23 Failure v2 on the Restart time inverter capacity Hi4 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Selected deceleration time 0 01 Has Y Y 999 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command He Allowable momentary 0 0 to 30 0 o1 s Y Y 999 power failure time 999 Automatically determined by inverter H26 Thermistor Mode selection 0 Disable Ty Y 0 1 Enable With PTC the inverter immediately tips with displayed H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 oo v y Y 1 60 H28_ Droop control 60 0 t0 0 0 oi te y Y 0 0 5 60 H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command v Y o Mode selection 0 F01 C30 F02 1 RS 485 F02 2 FO1 C30 RS 485 3 RS 485 RS 485 4 RS 485 option Fo2 5 RS 485 option RS 485 6 FO1 C30 RS 485 option 7 RS 485 RS 485 option 8 RS 485 option RS 485 option H42_ Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DG link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecima _1 Y N 143 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication of cumulative run time of cooling f
103. N15E1S 40 1 5 2 2 RNO 2E1S 70 RNO 4E1S 70 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Select the MCCB or RCD ELCB with appropriate breaking capacity according to the power supply capacity A WARNING When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker and earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection in the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range Fire could occur Name of Main peripheral equipment peripheral Function and application equipment Magnetic An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output Secondary contactor MC sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines m At the power supply primary side Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply generally commercial factory power lines with the protection function built into the inverter or with the terminal signal line 2 Stop the inverter op
104. N2 1036 Overload prevention control 1037 Current detected ID 1038 Current detected 2 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 1049 Switched to motor 2 swm2 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1080 1081 Reserved for particular manufacturers 1082 1099 Alarm output for any alarm Functions assigned Symbol NI Oa R O rm oO N N N Le cor ie wo oO wo wo wo oa wo o wo XQ wo A DO A oa NI a N Kel o Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 Em Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified
105. N4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 5 34 10 ED models Continuous braking Intermittent braking Braking resistor 100 braking Period Less than a Inverter type Resistance T torque 1008 voltage Q Discharging Braking Allowable Duty Type Qty capacity time average ED kws s loss kW FRNO 1E1S 20 1000 100 FRNO 2E1S 20 500 75 FRNO4E1S 20 DBO 75 2C 100 50 aT 0 075 oF FRNO 75E1S 200 133 20 Three FRNISEIS20 0B2 2 20 40 55 ce 0 110 phase FRN2 2E1S 20 50 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1S 20 DB5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275 T FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 FRN11E1S 20 DB11 2C 10 55 10 0 55 FRN15E1S 20 DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75 FRNO 4E1S40 DBo 75 4C 200 50 250 f ooz FRNO 75E1S 40 133 20 FRN1 5E1S 40 1 73 14 a FRND DE1Sag DB2 2 4C 160 55 50 0 110 phase NAE caer DB37 4C 130 140 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1S 40 DB5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 10 FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 FRN11E1S 40 DB11 4C 40 55 10 0 55 FRN15E1S 40 DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 FRNO 1E1S 70 1000 100 Single FRNO 2ZE1S 70 580 75 2 100 50 208 0 075 1 gt phase FRNO 4E1S 70 250 37 2
106. OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 74 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place i Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to Cip immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral equipment m Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying g GN keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input terminal command JOG E N keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Pressing these keys toggles between Normal operation the normal operation and ready for ae jogging Ready for jogging When the run command source is digital input F02 1 Input serea ay mang g GN keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Disable Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the T key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the D key is held down Rele
107. SY RANIREMOMIC BT RAS ERATEOHRCERSTE MEPSLUBBL MESHUR EA EZ E MRICMRESOGICOC ia FNS SE1S 2A Fo ewe 573710K1208 Sub nameplate Figure 1 3 Warning Plate and Sub Nameplate 3 Terminal block location Control circuit terminal block Control circuit terminal block gt i Main circuit Main circuit terminal block terminal block cover Main circuit terminal block a FRNO 75E1S 20 b FRN15E1S 20 Figure 1 4 Terminal Blocks Note A box O in the above model names replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination 1 2 1 3 Transportation When carrying an inverter always support its bottom at the right and left sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic and are easily broken 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage temperature 25 to 70 C A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt changes Relative humidity 5 to 95 2 in temperature that would result in the formation of fo condensation or ice Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops o
108. TER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring instructions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are described individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are required for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product
109. VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 Note 6 For the control signal wires use shielded or twisted pair wires Ground the shielded wires To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles 8 6 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models Unit mm Power suppl Dimensions mm Soleo ind Inverter type D DI D2 FRNO 1E1S 20 92 10 Three phase FRNO 2E1S 20 200 V FRNO 4E1S 20 107 25 FRNO 75E1S 20 132 82 50 FRNO 1E1S 70 92 10 Single phase FRNO 2E1S 70 200 V FRNO 4E1S 70 107 25 FRNO 75E1S 70 152 102 50 Les D1 Main nameplate Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Power supply Dimensions mm voltage Inverter type D D1 D2 Three phase FRNO 4E1S 40 126 86 40 400 V FRNO 75E1S 40 150 64 Note A box 0 in he above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination Main nameplate Unit mm Power supply Dimensions mm voltage Inverter type D D1 D2 Th
110. What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command block Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings e g cancel the higher priority run command 8 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter high and F16 Frequency limiter low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones Ss The coast to stop command was effective Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Check the cabling and wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them 11 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In winter the load tends to increase Check that a mechanical brake is in effect gt Release the mechanical brake if any 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boos
111. a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output terminals were short circuited Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the wires Check if the resistance is too low gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Possible Causes 2 Ground faults occurred at the inverter output terminals What to Check and Suggested Measures Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Loads were too heavy Measure the motor current with a measuring device and to trace the current trend Therefore use this information to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy decrease it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load variation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 4 The value set for torque boost F09 was too large F37 A13 0 1 3 or 4 Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not come to stall if y
112. a continuity test to the ground 1 MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information a AOUN 6 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Function codes and their data that you changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Date of purchase Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 2 Product warranty The term of product warranty is one year after the purchase or 24 months from the month and year of production specified on the nameplate whichever comes first However the product will not be repaired free of charge in the following cases even if the warranty term has not expired The cause includes incorrect usage or inappropriate repair or modification The product is used outside the standard specified range The failure is caused by dropping damage or breakage during transportation after the purchase The cause is earthquake fire
113. a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a guideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan are approaching their service life 1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with that at factory shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment poe e AA ee ee eee Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Incase the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi function keypad after the purchase put back the original standard keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to term
114. acy 5 32 In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control the inverter uses the motor parameters to control its speed Therefore the following conditions should be satisfied if not the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor A single motor should be controlled It is difficult to apply this control to a group motor driving system Motor parameters P02 P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are fully auto tuned The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the inverter If not the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers causing it difficult to accurately control the motor The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not exceed 50 m in length A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage current since the cable s electrostatic capacitance against the earth increases causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed
115. ain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 e The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency Gain 32 C37 2 a2 C57 oF C42 Point B Bias F18 Point A Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Bias F18 0 Analog input 0 1V 10 5V 50 100 I I Bias Gain base base point C50 point C34 5 27 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point
116. aker rated current is equivalent to or lower than the recommended rated current Installing an MC in the secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC ON or OFF Remove the magnet contactor MC already installed and built in surge killer from the inverter s output secondary circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power Installing an MC in the primary circuit Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use terminal FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key Protecting the motor The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use
117. all prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an acceleration deceleration time or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur iii A WARNING The gro key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the gro key To enable the gro key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON a sudden start will occur Ensure that the Run command signal is turned OFF in advance Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 the motor
118. ameters H03 2 or 3 4 PO03 A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set data Motor Rated current differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor Upon completion of the initialization the HO3 data reverts to 0 factory default If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with HO3 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor rating see the tables on the next page 5 53 E When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN__ _E10 0J Nominal Rated No load k 6 Rated slip R Sox applied current current frequency motor A A s Hz kW PO2 A16 P03 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 06 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 66 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 30 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 01 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 67 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 5 11 0 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 42 0 17 7 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 55 0 20 0 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50
119. an for replacement TY N Ha4_ Startup Times of Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup times T v N H45 Mock Alam 0 Disable v N 0 5 62 4 Enable Once a mockalarm occurs the data automatically retums to 0 HA7 initial Capacitance of DC LinkBus Indication for replacing DG link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal Y N Setat Capacitor factory shipping H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards 0000 to FFFF Y N Printed Circuit Boards Hexadecimal Resettable H49 Starting Mode Delay time 0 0 to 10 0 s ot s Y 0 0 557 H50 Nonlinear Vit Pattem 1 0 0 Cancel ot rz N Y 0 0 516 Frequency 0 1 to 400 0 H51 Voltage O to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 1 Tv N Ye 0 0 to 500 Output an AVA controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Nondinear Vit Patter 2 0 0 Cancel oa te N Y 0 0 Frequency 0 1 to 400 0 H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 1 fv N Ye 0 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H54 ACCIDEC Time 0 00 to 3600 oor s Y Y 6 00 Wogging operation ACC time and DEC time are common H56_ Deceleration Time for Forced Stop __ 0 00 to 3600 oor s Y Y 6 00 H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 N Y 1 initial frequency setting _1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing run command H63 Low Limiter Mode
120. anism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant rz Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the CNote overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 m Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency 5 20 The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors a1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 b Base frequency Even if the specified base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fo 60 Hz i Output frequency 0 f2 fo fo fo Hz Cooling Cha
121. ansistor output When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 3 from the MCCB or ELCB when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 4 8 5 Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 8 3 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands Note 1 DBR DCR nn GEN aos THR Note 4 Note 2 DB MCCB p o Note 3 Main circuit Power ELC8 MC P1 Plt DB N Three phase gt LU U single phase Motor 200 to 240 V Thi 50 60 Hz msi M 3 or three phase x 380 to 480 V Lam 50 60 Hz Grounding terminal e G Grounding terminal on Potentiometer power supply 3 13 2 PTC Voltage input for setting y 12 DCO to 10 V 1 11 Analog lt sws c1 input Current voltage input C1 SW7 for setting F 111 v
122. any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 CTip E10 E11 are switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 FO9 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load F09 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for Torque boost Auto energy F37 Vit pattern F09 saving Variable torque V f pattern Applicable load Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Torque boos ified b or Mee Disable Linear Vit pattern Auto torque Constant torque load To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed specified by General purpose fans and pumps F09 Enable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load V f pattern ess torque To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Note Ifa required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f patte
123. arding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo cho Bldg 5 7 Nihonbashi Odemma cho Chuo ku Tokyo 103 0011 Japan Phone 81 3 5847 8011 Fax 81 3 5847 8172 URL hittp www fujielectric co jp fcs 2006 03 C06 C06 10CM
124. arm signal is correctly connected to the terminal to which the Alarm from external equipment has been assigned Any of E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 is set to 9 gt Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly 3 Incorrect settings Check if the Alarm from external equipment has not been assigned to an unused terminal E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the assignment normal negative logic of the external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 gt Ensure that the polarity matches 8 GY Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Possible Causes Temperature of the motor rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor motor exceeded that of motor specifications gt Lower the temperature 2 Cooling system for the motor malfunctioned Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound carrier frequency F26 4 The set activation level H27
125. asing the fun key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply gems The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal Note operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG Em Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz1 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default Input terminal command Hz2 H21 Frequency command source OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 5 39 m Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C turns ON If no M2 M1 terminal command is assign
126. at or inverter overload with an alarm indication of L47 or L4 L respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s Disable overload prevention control Cnote In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease ote in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque Cnote This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if NO there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is usefu
127. at the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Cote If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Check whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met Noto The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment 2 Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and check the accumulated run time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours 7 5 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the accumulated run time of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for
128. ation deceleration time 2 is applied 6 7 7 Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure the motor does not restart Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either 0 or m4 What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 4 or 5 2 The run command stayed off even after power has been restored Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command on While in 3 wire operation the power source to the inverter s control PCB went down because of a long momentary power failure or the HOLD signal was turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 8 The inverter doesn t run as expected Possible Causes 1 Miss configuration of function codes What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether any function code is correctly configured and no unnecessary configuration has been done gt Configure all the function code validly Make a note of function code data currently configured and initialize all function code data H03 gt After the above process reconfigure functio
129. begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage Time reserved for restart N Sc about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF Ready to run i 1 i j i No power gt i poof State of the inverter E Y Waiting for run command ON Run command ON Restart command However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence e Ifthe Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency Cote e When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run Note 5 24 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurr
130. cations can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted Q Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well m Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DI O interface card The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional DI O interface card just like the control circuit terminals Table 3 19 lists the assignment between LED segments and DI O signals Table 3 19 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED Segment QOO LALL Bit Input terminal Output terminal 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance information is as same as its of in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To view the maintenance information
131. cations link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 F01 C30 Frequency Command 1 and 2 F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for Enable A Q keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC 5 13 Data for F01 C30 Function Enable the current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal BCD code or binary data ent
132. ceding the start of auto search for the idling Not motor speed When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled F14 4 or 5 and the allowable momentary power failure time specified H16 turning a run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events H11 Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy Cnot When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor L7 according to the deceleration commands
133. change with keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation vs 24 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 25 1025 Universal DI U D1 26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor s speed at starting 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 42 1042 Reserved 2 43 1043 Reserved 2 44 1044 Reserved 2 45 1045 Reserved 2 Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively E10 Acceleration Time 2 10 00 to 3600 Y 10 0 5 17 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring extemal soft start E11 Deceleration Time 2 10 00 to 3600 X 10 0 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring extemal soft start E16 Torque Limiter 2 20 to 200 Y 999 5 31 Limiting level for driving 999 Disable E17 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 Y 999 1999 Disable E20 Terminal Y1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to Y o 5 43 terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C as listed below E21_ Terminal Y2 Function 0 1000 Inverter running RUN Y 7 27_ Terminal 30A B C Function 1 1001 Frequency ani
134. characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors The shaded function codes are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 6 H codes High Performance Functions 0 1 to 60 0 5 7 Incre Change pata Default Referto Code Name Data setting range Unit when ment copying setting page running H03 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization oN N 0 5 53 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters Hoa Auto xeset Times 0 Disable 1 times Y Y 0 5 55 1to 10 HOS Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 oi s Y Y 5 0 H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation y Y 0 556 1 Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattem 0 Linear Ty Y 0 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Cunilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable N Y 0 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited H09 Staring
135. come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar m Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power supply Name of option Function and application Main option DC reactors DCRs A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction for reduction of harmonics 1 For power supply matching Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more than the rated inverter capacity In this case the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF 2 For input power factor correction reduction of harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to correct the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power supply so as to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and correct the power
136. ct signal when the inverter Yes output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output for any fault lt Alarm reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the Eri Yes detection data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error Erg Yes communications between the inverter and the keypad during operation using error detection the standard keypad or the multi function keypad optional CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise E J Yes detection or some other factors this function stops the inverter Not applicable LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 80A B C Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the Er4 communications inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output error detection Option error When an option card has detected an error this function stops ErS a detection the inverter output Operation STOP Pressing the Gro key on the keypad forces the inverter 4 5 Yes protection key to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is Priority running by any run commands give
137. ctory setting 1 Check if the LED monitor displays 7 77 means that the frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 If the LED monitor displays numbers except 2 77 press A V keys to set 7 717 as the frequency command 2 Check if a built in cooling fan rotates For the inverter of 0 75 kW or below no cooling fan is mounted Figure 4 2 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Before running the motor set function code data specified in Table 4 1 to the motor ratings and your system design values For the motor check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them Q For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 1 Setting up function codes quickly Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory default setting of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test Function code Function code data Factory setting Base frequency 50 0 Hz Rated voltage Three phase 200 V class series 200 V at base frequency Three phase 400 V class series 400 V Motor ratings printed on the nameplate Applicable motor rated capacity of the motor
138. cuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input or L1 L and L2 N for single phase input to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Gip It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident ACAUTION
139. curred between the option card and the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the option card is properly mating with the connector of the inverter gt Reload the bus option card into the inverter 2 There was a high intensity noise from outside 16 amp S Option card error An error detected by the option Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Reinforce noise control measures card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 17 amp amp Operation protection Problem Possible Causes 1 The 609 key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 You incorrectly operated the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal or through the communications port the inverter was forced to decelerate to stop gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 The start check function was activated when H96 2or3 8 With a Run command being inputted any of the following operations has been performed Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96
140. d below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor No alarm code appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase _ Goto Section 6 2 1 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed 5 If grating sound can be heard 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time 7 Even if the power recovers after an instantaneous power failure the motor does not restart Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed if an alarm code appears on the LED monitor f an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor while no alarm code is displayed Goto Section 6 2 2 Go to Section 6 3 Go to Section 6 4 If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormal
141. d by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory SE etting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm u I condition alarm code 4 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics L Specified with F12 Driving time of motor min 3 n i a E a 0 5 0 50 100 150 200 Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 5 22 F14 Restart Mode after Instantaneous Power Failure H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode afte
142. d for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 5 11 5 4 E code continued Incre Data Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Unit ment copying setting page E98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to Y 98 5 35 terminals FWD and REV as listed below E99 Terminal REV Function 0 1000 Select multi frequency ss1 _ Y 99 1 1001 Select multi frequency S82 2 1002 Select multi frequency 884 3 1003 Select multi frequency SS8 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time RTI 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 141 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 12 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK 14 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1
143. e 1 Change or reset the cumulative data 5 63 H95 DC Braking 0 Slow 1 5 28 Braking response mode 1 Quick H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function Data STOP key priority Start check function 0 Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable H97 Clear Alarm Data Setting H97 data to 1 clears alarm data and then retums to zero 0 5 62 H98 Protection Maintenance Function 10 to 31 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in decimal format 19 5 63 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled bit4 Mode selection Lower the carrier frequency automatically 1 0 1 Detect input phase loss Detect output phase loss Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor A codes Motor 2 Parameters copying setting page A01_ Maximum Frequency 2 Table A 4 A02_ Base Frequency 2 Table A 4 A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage Table A 4 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Table A 4 160 to 500V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series A05 Torque Boost 2 10 0 to 20 0 Depending percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 on the Note This setting takes effect when A13 0 1 3 or 4 in
144. e LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned off E Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 22 To access the slide switches remove the terminal cover and keypad QI For details on how to remove the terminal cover refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and main circuit terminal block cover Table 2 10 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 10 Function of Each Slide Switch Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SW1 to the SOURCE position sw3 Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default
145. e inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 9 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Max voltage V Min voltage V 10 Voltage unbalance ee ge V x67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN__ _E1S 70 01 0 2 04 0 75 15 22 Nominal applied motor KW 4 04 02 o os 15 z2 Rated capacity kVA 2 03 os 11 19 3 0 44 amp Rated voltage vy Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function i id 08 15 3 0 5 0 80 n 3 Rated covert N on 14 25 42 70 10 Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz A Voltagevtrequency variations Voltage 10 to 10 Frequency 5 to 5 with DCR 1
146. e specified size e Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise fire could occur Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output circuit Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to connect the grounding wire for the inverters grounding terminal G Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 3 Z 4 6 aS 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals Symbol Functions L1 R L2 S L3 T Main circuit power Connect the three phase input power lines or single phase or L1 L L2 N inputs input power lines U V W In
147. e torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor Data for H69 Function Disable Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FO8 E11 Enable Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Onc t Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration NOE time When a brake unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control 5 62 H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overhe
148. ear instead 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID command specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appear 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for o 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 3 5 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using A and Q keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed etc by setting function code E48 E Setting up a frequency command Using and V keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 S keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the Y key to display the current
149. ection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 0 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command Y Y 0 5 60 0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 1 Via field bus option Follow H30 data 2 Follow H30 data Via field bus option 3 Via field bus option Via field bus option y99_ Loader Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command Y N 0 0 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data 1 Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data 2 Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader 3 Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination Function Shipping Destination 5 ae A F aiwan ani code Asia China EU Japan Korea F03 A01 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 F04 A02 60 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 F05 A03 220 200 230 200 200 For 200 V class series FO6 A04 380 380 400 400 400 For 400 V class series F14 1 1 0 1 F26 2 2 15 2 2 E31 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 E46 1 0 1 0 5 11 m Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when Notation running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is
150. ection and preparation prior to powering on we A 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 4 2 lt Tuning procedure gt m Errors during tuning 4 1 4 Test run 4 2 Operation 4 2 1 Jogging Operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables 5 2 Overview of Function Codes Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED MOMO crete iter el treet oceans 6 10 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed hua 6 24 6 2 6 2 6 8 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 1 Daily INSPeCtiOn cceececeteteteeseteteeeeees 7 2 Periodic Inspection 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit 7 5 Insulation Test 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 9 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 2 1 General specifications of keypad 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad 8 3 Terminal Specifica
151. ectronic thermal overload alarm 2 Problem Possible Causes 1 The characteristics of electronic thermal did not match those of the motor overload Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 and A39 A06 and A08 gt Use an external thermal relay Activation level for the electronic thermal relay was inadequate B Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function codes F11 and A07 The acceleration deceleration time was too short g Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration deceleration This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 4 Load was too heavy 11 GUL Overload Problem Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the
152. ed motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command Selected motor SWM2 status M2 M1 after completion of switching OFF Motor 1 OFF ON Motor 2 ON Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2 Maximum Frequency FoS A01 Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03 Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 A10 Braking time F22 A11 Starting Frequency F23 A12 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13 Control Mode Selection F42 A14 Motor No of poles P01 A15 Rated capacity P02 A16 Rated current P03 A17 Auto tuning P04 A18 Online tuning P05 A19 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 X P08 A22 Slip compensation gain for driving Pog A23 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Motor Selection P99 A39 Slip Compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 Output Curren
153. ed as the run command F02 1 A will appear upon completion of the measurements The run command is turned OFF and the tuning completes with the next function code FL5 or Hict displayed on the keypad the run command given through the keypad or the communications link is automatically turned OFF 4 3 9 E Errors during tuning Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning it will display 7and discard the tuning data Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning Abnormal error condition Abnormal result of tuning Description An inter phase unbalance has been detected Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Abnormal output current An abnormally high current has been caused during tuning Sequence error During tuning the run command has been turned OFF or forced STOP coast to stop command BX dew condensation protection DWP or a similar abnormal command has been received Limitation exceeded During tuning a certain limitation has been reached or exceeded The maximum output frequency or the peak limiter for output frequency has been reached or exceeded Other alarm condition An undervo
154. eleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output frequency Acc time i i Dec time Reference i _ Reference Maximum Acc ti f Dec time frequency ae mC FO3 A01 gt Time Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 20 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the machinery s load torque Note H09 H49 Sta
155. enable the UP and DOWN terminal Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE Reference frequency at the time of previous UP DOWN control Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching commands you need to set frequency command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand 5 42 m Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function m Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to HO9 Starting mode m Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm 4 displayed m Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to
156. ensation y Wy v Be SS 3 01 59 99 Output frequency ome After slip compensation 3 8 S i 12 wnn Torque limit value 3 13 oe SOE Level 2 Jo Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 16 Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the A and keys to display Drive Monitoring Fai Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 7 i 7 SB Use the A and V keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the S key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the key again to return to the menu S Table 3 12 Drive Monitor Display Items LED monitor Description shows Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated torque Reference frequency Rotational Rotational direction being outputted direction forward reverse stop Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Calculated output torque of the motor in Frequency specified by a frequency command
157. ent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 DC link bus Undervoltage i voltage i Searching for motor speed Output frequency Motor speed Acceleration Auto restarting after i i i momentary power failure i ON IPF H a Time m Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting C The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of Cote undervoltage
158. equency After slip compensation Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Constant feeding rate time E50_ Coefficient for Speed Indication 10 01 to 200 00 1 30 00 5 48 E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour 0 000 Cancel reset 0 010 Data 10 001 to 9999 Keypad Venu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 and 1 0 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition 0 Current input C1 function 4 to 20 mADC 0 5 48 C1 V2 Function 1 Voltage input V2 function 0 to 10 VDC E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 0 5 49 terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function as listed below E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function 0 None 0 C1 function 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 0 V2 function 3 PID command 1 5 PID feedback amount E65 Reference Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop 999 Continuous running frequency 20 to 120 999 Disable The shaded function codes 75 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 an
159. er ON i Running mode Spe Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data 1 Menu 0 Quick Setup i QFnc gt FGI a g SE a A y Tu DS i 1 e i 1 cna ru 1 t 1 a com 1 DATA E uS i 7 1 1 mi i ERE 1 FOS i 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 i 1 1 3 e ooo m road u Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 3 oe This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default N V keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the gt key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example 7 7 is displayed If anything other than Ac is displayed use the A and keys to display Arc far Press the Gs key to proceed to a list of function codes Use the A and Q keys to display the desired function code 7 in this example then press the G5 key The data of this function code appears In this example data of 7
160. erage loss These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss respectively Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor as listed on the torong pages Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the Cote electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm m Y even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes 5 33 The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models E External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the dischargi
161. eration in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually Note When your system requires the motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV or with the keypad E At the output secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter Note As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s output side may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has
162. ered via the DIO interface card option For details refer to the DIO Interface Card Instruction Manual Enable the pulse train entered via the PG interface card option For details refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual Zn To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 set function code Note C35 to 0 Setting C35 to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V e Terminal C1 can be used for current input C1 function or voltage input V2 function depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and function code E59 In addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multi frequency are provided Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals Tip switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E05 5 14 F02 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor Data for F02 Run Command Source Description Keypad Enables the run T keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV command External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run the motor Ke
163. ert a braking resistor between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident e Generally control signal wires are not reinforced insulation If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In sucha case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock ACAUTION Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Otherwise injuries could occur The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation A WARNING Be sure to install the terminal cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the covers while power is applied Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting e If the st
164. erter E For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES and the RS 485 Communications User s Manual MEH448b FOO Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the A v keys Data for FOO Function Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the N V keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the N O keys But you cannot change function code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the N O keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the AN V keys Enabling the protection disables the DiQ keys to change function code data To change F00 data simultaneous keying of N from 0 to 1 or 4 O from 1 to 0 keys is required C Tip Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the AIP communi
165. eset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Surge Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear protection between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Command loss Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a detected broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Not applicable LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 against ms this function stops the inverter output a If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function P invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload prevention condition alarm code 74 or LILL the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the ErH Yes control printed circuit board control PCB and power printed circuit board power PCB interface printed circuit board interface PCB or option card or short circuit between terminals 13 and 11 is detected Mock alarm Si
166. even if H11 1 Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time Cote The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current SS limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm i When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into acc
167. f containers Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Top 100mm Left Right 10mm Bottom 100mm Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances m When mounting two or more inverters Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more inverters are to be installed in the same unit or panel If it is necessary to mount the inverters vertically install a partition plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any gap between them only for inverters with a capacity of less than 5 5 kW m When employing external cooling At the shipment time the inverter is set up for mount inside your equipment or panel so that cooling is done all internally To improve cooling efficiently you can take the heat sink out of the equipment or the panel as shown on the right so that cooling is done both internally and externally this is called external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the panel As a result much less heat is radiated inside the equipment or the panel To take advantage of external cooling you need to use the exter
168. factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 Note At the time of shipping a jumper bar is connected across the terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the short bar when connecting a DCR Output circuit filters OFLs Include an OFL in the inverter power output secondary circuit to 1 Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high surge voltage 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output lines OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Note Use an output circuit secondary filter of OFL OOO DA Zero phase reactors for reducing radio frequency noise ACL An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency noise caused by switching operation for the power supply primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times Use 4 ACLs and let the power supply lines pass through them when the power supply lines size are large If wiri
169. fect in all the operation modes E Timer J67 J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any unexpected momentary load fluctuation If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the timer J67 the inverter activate it in case of J65 1 or 2 Cote If J65 3 the timer setting is ignored In this case the inverter decelerates the motor ow instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to interfere running of this function J68 to J72 Braking Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency Brake OFF timer Brake ON frequency and Brake ON timer These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of hoisting elevating machines Releasing the Brake The inverter releases the brake Terminal command BRKS ON after checking torque generation of the motor monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to the motor which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough Function code Data setting range 0 to 200 Brake OFF current hi g Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100 Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Turning on the brake To assure the service life of brake body the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough less than one specified monitoring that the run command turns OFF and t
170. for HO9 For restart after momentary power failure F14 4 or 5 For normal startup 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Enable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Note When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL O000 2 and 4 in Not the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL OOO DA instead E Auto search delay time H49 Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately coast to stop it and perform auto search every switching H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing control The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied Cnote Be sure to auto tune the inverter pre
171. frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis width E30 and then the frequency arrival delay time E29 has elapsed Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 m Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting output current limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload stop hit mechanical stop it automatically activates the stall free facility and shifts the output frequency When such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more this output signal comes ON This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the monitor 5 45 m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip 74 actually happens ILI I This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip Li temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip LiH temperature minus 8 C m Service life alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal sh
172. functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the data of the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 and A41 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 5 If grating sound can be heard from motor Possible Causes 1 The carrier frequency was set too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Readjust the setting of F27 to appropriate value 2 The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Measure the temperature inside the panel of the inverter gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load In the case of a fan or a pump lower the setting data of the frequency limiter F15 H 11 Note If you disable H98 an 47 or LiL L alarm may occur 3 Resonance with the load Check the precision of the mounting of the load or check whether there is resonance with the panel or likes gt Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter and determine where the resonance comes from Upon locating
173. g Frequency 0 00 to 400 0 0 01 Hz Y 0 00 C21 Timer Operation 0 Disable y oO 5 50 1 Enable C30 Frequency Command 2 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad Y 2 5 13 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 2 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function 5 Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control 11 DIO interface card option 12 PG interface card option 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 5 C code continued Change Code Name Data setting range incre Unit ues Pate Detail Palarie ment copying setting page C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 0 0 5 50 Offset c32 Gain 100 0 5 27 C33 Filter time constant 0 05 5 50 C34 Gain base point 100 0 5 27 C35 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 1 Unipolar C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 5 50 C1 function Offset C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 1 100 0 5 27 C38 Filter time constant 0 05 5 50 c39 Gain base point 100 0 5 27 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 0 0 5 50 V2 function Offset C42 Gain 100 0 5 27 C43
174. g o o Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg os 06 o7 o8 17 17 23 34 36 61 7A 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 3 4 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 9 Voltage unbalance x67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Note A box O in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN__ _E1S 49 04 075 15 22 37 4 o9 55 75 15 Nominal applied motor kW 4 04 075 15 22 37 409 55 75 15
175. ge current to start running to the extent that it caused a temporary voltage drop on the supply side Measure the input voltage and check the voltage variation gt Reconsider the power system configuration i caused the power voltage drop because power supply transformer capacity was insufficient 4 m Input phase loss Problem Possible Causes 1 Main circuit power input wires broken Inverter s inrush current Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit breaker an earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the wires 2 The terminal screws for the main circuit power input of the inverter were not tight enough Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 3 Interphase unbalance rate of three phase voltage was too large Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter capacity 4 Overload cyclically occurred Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage gt If the ripple is large raise the inverter
176. h an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones An option card or multi function keypad is used e Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit number Select life Judge the life judgment Function of DC link bus threshold of DC capacitor link bus capacitor Lower the Detect output Detect input carrier phase loss phase loss frequency automatically Data 0 Disable Use the factory Disable Disable Disable default Data 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable setting Example of Enable 1 Use the factory Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal default 0 expression Conversion table Decimal to from binary Binary Binary Decimal Decimal Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 0 3 0
177. hanges the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor _ f the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or Note mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor F29 to F31 Analog Output FM Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function F33 Analog Output FM Pulse rate These function codes allow terminal FM to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse pulse duty approximately 50 The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable E Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FM You need to set switch SW6 on the interface printed circuit board PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Position of slide switch SW6 Data tor tee Output form mounted on the interface PCB Voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA function FMA Pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP function FMP E Voltage adjustment F30 dedicated to FMA F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 4 F30 200 F30 100 F30 50 Out of scale D 10V a 3 gt 3 F30 33 Hi
178. hd 5V E os S E v H 0 50 100 200 300 Meter scale m Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal FM Function Meter scale Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency Output frequency of the inverter before slip Equivalent to the motor Maximum frequency F03 A01 compensation synchronous speed Output frequency after slip Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 A01 compensation FM output Output current RMS of the inverter Output voltage RMS of the 250 V for 200 V class series inverter 500 V for 400 V class series Output current Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor Load factor Equivalent to the indication of Twice the rated motor load the load meter Twice the rated output of the nput power Input power of the inverter inverter PID feedback Feedback amount under PID 9 amount PV control 00 of the feedback amount Feedback value of closed loop PG feedback value control through the PG o interface 100 of the feedback value Maximum speed DC link bus DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 200 V class series voltage inverter 000 V for 400 V class series Command via cormminications link Refer to the RS 485 o Communication User s Manual 20000 as 100 MEH448b Motor output Motor output kW Tw
179. he inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ID or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the D or ID2 turns OFF Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign D data 37 or D2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals ssnin anbi e ENAERE EEA T E34 E37 x 0 9 Output Current 1E35 E38 _ ON ioe 5 47 E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Load shaft speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Constant feeding rate time min Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9
180. he motor Consider any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect an output circuit filter option to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect a DC reactor option to terminals P1 and P Note e The wiring length should be 10 m or below Chot Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor DCR is not going to be used e If a converter is connected you do not need to connect a DC reactor DCR A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB 1 Connect a DC braking resistor option to terminals P and DB 2 When using an external braking resistor arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel A WARNING Never insert a DC braking resistor between the terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire 2 13 When a DC reactor DCR is not connected
181. he output frequency lowers than one specified for the time long enough and turn on the brake terminal command BRKS OFF Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Z The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1 If the motor switching vote function selects motor 2 the braking signal always remains at state of turning on When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast to stop terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter the braking signal turns on immediately Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNING If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to off reset the alarm Note that if the alarm is reset while any run commands are set to on the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may cause the motor to rotate Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T L1 L and L2 N for single phase voltage input voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has droppe
182. he shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 8 4 2 Standard keypad Unit mm For remote operation or panel wall mounting The keypad rear cover should be mounted i s in panel viewed from A 8 5 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During tf Yes protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration overload Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit During Oe deceleration Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This protection is During running effective only during startup of the inverter If at constant you turn ON the inverter without removing speed the ground fault this protection may not work Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During chi i Yes protection an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for acceleration three phase 200 V 800 VDC for three phase Durin ry 1 400 V class series in the DC link bus cee EE deceleration This protection is not assured if extremely Duri A prem large AC line voltage is applied inadvertently uring running Wud at constant speed stopped U
183. her one and check whether the problem persists 2 The desired menu is not displayed Possible Causes 1 The limiting menus function was not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu can be displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes BS codes is protected The data of the function Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 or 3 to 0 or 2 The WE KP command Enable data change with keypad is not S input though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal The 8 key was not pressed amp Check whether you have pressed the S key af
184. her than 0 PID command currently selected 3 9 Setting up the primary frequency command with O and Q keys under PID dancer control When function code F01 is set to 0 XN Y keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a primary frequency command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the Y Y keys In Programming or Alarm mode the OU keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 7 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary frequency command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command 2 The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 7 Primary Frequency Command Specified with AIS Keys and Requirements Communi Frequency Multi Multi cations Cancel PID monitor command frequency frequency link control E43 1 F01 SS2 SS1 operation Hz PID LE PID control Mode HED selection J01 Pressing O keys controls OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output ON Keypad primary PID command disabled Frequency OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output Other than the above ON Current pr
185. hine system Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the safety device Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2 which the tuning is to be performed on Tuning results by P04 will be applies to P codes for the motor 1 and the tuning results by A18 will be applies to A codes for the motor 2 Cote Assigning the command Switch to motor 2 SWM2 to any of the terminal Y1 e Y2 or 30A B C will automatically switch the output status of SWM2 depending on the motor selected for the tuning 4 Perform tuning Set function code P04 or A18 to 1 or 2 and press the E key The blinking of or con the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command for the rotation direction you have chosen The factory default setting is forward rotation upon pressing the oN key on the keypad To switch to reverse rotation change the setting of function code F02 The display of or lt stays lit and tuning takes place while the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time approximately 40 s If the function code P04 or A18 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning takes place Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate and stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 s Deceleration time Tuning will continue after the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time approximately 10 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is select
186. ication RJ 45 connector resistor sw3 RJ 45 connector pin assignment Figure 2 20 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment e Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as Cote possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions e Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit The RJ 45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC Multi series is different from that on the FVR E11S series Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR E11S series of inverter Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Mounting the interface printed circuit board interface PCB Note Usually you do not need to remove the interface PCB However if you remove the interface PCB be sure to mount the interface PCB by putting hooks provided on the interface PCB into the inverter until you have heard click sound Hooks Interface printed circuit board interface PCB N WA Figure 2 21 Mounting the Interface Printed Circuit Board Interface PCB 2 21 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches A WARNING Before changing the switches turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that th
187. ice the rated motor output iae Full scale output of the meter This always outputs the full scale Calibration calibration 100 PID command Command value under PID X SV control 00 of the feedback amount Output level of the PID PID output MV controller under PID control Maximum frequency F03 A01 Frequency command 42 If F31 16 PID output JO1 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio Note compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 data to 33 Universal AO E Pulse rate F33 dedicated to FMP F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected F40 F41 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting levels for driving and braking E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting levels for driving and braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter F40 E16 and the braking torque limiter F41 E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque
188. ices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter onto the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit or ground Connect a surge absorber in parallel with a coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor 3 Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitors of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occur take an appropriate measure against them
189. ider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the performance of the current braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required 2 Deceleration time currently specified is too short Re estimate the deceleration torque and time needed for the current load with a moment of inertia and a deceleration time gt Lengthen the deceleration time F08 E11 or H56 gt Review the performance of the braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required 3 Wrong configuration of function codes F50 and F51 Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor gt Review data of function codes F50 and F51 then reconfigure them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature Therefore even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise when the use of the brake exceeds more frequently than the one specified by function codes F50 and 51 the inverter issues an overheat alarm To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure data of function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor 6 16 10 4 Electronic thermal overload alarm 1 Le El
190. ies connected brakes Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation vi In running special motors Synchronous motors It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Even if a single phase power supply is available use a three phase motor as the inverter provides three phase output Environ mental conditions Installation location Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Combina tion with peripheral devices Installing an MCCB or RCD ELCB Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit bre
191. imary PID command disabled Frequency Link disabled F01 0 LE OFF Primary frequenc connai from d Q i SS2 SS1 OFF f keypad Frequency setting O other than above Final frequency command Command via link Te Multi frequency command PID output as frequency command PID cancel o Hz PID ON 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the 3 key starts z KEYPAD running the motor in the forward direction and timin CONTROL PRG MODE pressing the 6 key decelerates the motor to stop The 3 key is enabled only in Running mode The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of function code F02 m Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and 3 key Table 3 8 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the S key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 8 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the S key runs the motor In the direction commanded by the terminal FWD or REV Note 9 key disabled The motor is driven by terminal FWD or REV command In the forward direction Note The rotational direction of Stee IEC compliant motors is opposite In the reverse direction to that of the motor shown here For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES
192. ime Note m Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing displayed and modify the function code data keys simultaneously with the alarm Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Running Programming Y 4 B _ mode _ N Alarm occurs Erd S ea E nd ie we n or eee x lem F sprox Output frequency eT fe om Switching at approx OU requency Current alarm code Z an __ t 2acond intervals TAA E prap gt 6 0u azi g of a a x mpa z DL te Nem Switching at approx Output current 1 ser intervals BF 2RN Oy V item Switching at approx Error sub code 5 1 second ink intervals n 6e i pne o fire Most recent alarm code oy r gt Eg ae le Same as above 2nd recent alarm code amp i I Same as above Eg 2 iu ac eS a foe 3rd recent alarm code oe pap Pm gt Same as above E g 38H49 EN Ss List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 28 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on Check the following prior to powering on 1 Check if connection is correct Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N and output term
193. inals FWD REV and X1 through X5 of the control circuit e f a potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e f an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 and Y2 and relay output signals 30A B C will not be turned ON Note If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Cnote If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor 7 4 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the
194. inals U V and W respectively and that the grounding wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly Refer to Figure 4 1 A WARNING Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur Inverter exposed live parts and ground faults Oc UR ws ut U v w 6G 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws H O O 6 O O 4 Check if the motor is separated from mechanical nJ equipment 5 Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not start or operate erroneously at power on 2 Check for short circuits between terminals and f Power 6 Check if safety measures are taken against supply E9 Wire connection for three phase runaway of the system e g a defense to protect power suppl people from unexpectedly approaching your power Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit system Terminals 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking A WARNING Be sure to install the terminal cover if any before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no function code data is changed from the fa
195. ion card Frequency command Follow H30 data Via RS 485 communications li option card Run command Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Combination of command sources Via field bus option Frequency command Inverter itself Inverter itself H30 0 y98 0 Via RS 485 communications link standard H30 1 y98 0 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option H30 0 1 or 4 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link standard H30 2 y98 0 H30 3 y98 0 H30 2 3 or 5 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link option card H30 6 y98 0 H30 7 y98 0 H30 8 y98 0 H30 6 7 or 8 y98 1 o g 2 D n ne i S E E fe 3 c a Via field bus option a H30 0 2 or 6 y98 2 H30 1 3 or 7 y98 2 H30 4 5 or 8 y98 2 H30 0 1 to 8 y98 3 For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual H45 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock
196. ion command to be modified with the Y key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the N V key to display the PID dancer position command The lowest digit and its decimal point blink on the LED monitor 4 To change the command press the WN key again The command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory as function code J57 data It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via keypad PID command Furthermore you can directly configure the command with function code J57 Pn Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID command SS4 or SS8 ON you still can Tip set the PID dancer position command using the keypad When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the Y Y key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed I 4 Decimal point Table 3 6 PID Command Manually Set with AO Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote LED monitor Multi frequency selection command SV E43 SS4 SS8 J01 J02 With A V key PID command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF Ot
197. ir vent is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 3 Accumulated running time of the cooling fan exceeded the standard period for replacement or the cooling fan malfunctioned 4 Load was too heavy Check the cumulative running time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before the overload protection occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 6 14 7 G42 Alarm issued by an external device Problem External alarm was inputted THR when Enable external alarm trip THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals X1 through X5 Possible Causes FWD and REV What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 An alarm function of the external equipment was activated Inspect external equipment operation gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Connection has been performed incorrectly Check if the wire for the external al
198. isable 0 01 s Y Y 0 00 0 01 to 30 00 F23_ Starting Frequency 1 0 1 1060 0 ot tw yY Y 05 529 F24 Holding time 0 01 to 10 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 00 F25 Stop Frequency 0 1 t0 60 0 ot tz yY Y 02 Te vior Sound Carer frequency 0 75 to 15 1 kHz Y Y__ Tablea 4 F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive y Y o 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 The shaded function codes 774 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit i 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 5 11 5 1 F codes continued Code F29 F30 F31 F33 Name Analog Output FM Vode selection Voltage adjustment Function Pulse rate Data setting range 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s _ FMP Incre ment Unit Data copying Default setting lo to 300 FMA Select a function to be monitored from the followings Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output curren
199. itor blinks while indicating the i717 Hz frequency 2 Set the frequency to a low frequency such as 5 Hz using N O keys Check that frequency command blinks on the LED monitor 3 Press the S key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the frequency command is displayed on the LED monitor correctly 4 To stop the motor press the key lt Check the following points gt e Check if the direction of rotation is forward e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the key again to start driving the motor and increase the frequency command using A O keys Check the above points for the test driving of the motor 4 2 Operation After confirming ordinary operation by performing a test run make mechanical connections connections of the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and set the necessary parameters properly before starting a production run Note Depending on the conditions of the production run further adjustments can be required such as adjustments of torque boost F09 acceleration time F07 and deceleration time F08 Make sure to set relevant function codes properly 4 2 1 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display
200. ive 6 18 13 Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the standard keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Break in the communications cable or poor contact What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable 2 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual 3 The keypad malfunctioned 14 amp 3 CPU error Problem A CPU error e g Possible Causes 1 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter Check that alarm lt does not occur if you connect another keypad to the inverter gt Replace the keypad erratic CPU operation occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Improve noise control 15 amp 4 Option card communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with the connection between the option card and the inverter A communications error oc
201. iven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF back to the original values and then restart the operation 3 The control circuit failed Check if amp occurs each time power is switched ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 22 21 Hardware error Problem Possible Causes 1 The interface PCB is wrongly mounted Abnormality on the control PCB or related hardware What to Check and Suggested Measures Remove the interface PCB once and remount it into the card slot until it clicks into place 2 The capacity is not set properly on the control PCB The inverter capacity needs to be modified again gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 3 An abnormality is found in the interconnection between the control PCB power PCB and interface PCB Replacement of any boards with an hazard may be required gt Consult your Fuji Electric representative 4 Connection problem between the control PCB and the option card Either the control PCB or the option card needs to be replaced gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 5 Terminals 13 and 11 are short circuited with each other 22 Mock alarm Problem Possible Causes 1 Data of the function code H45 has been set to 1
202. iver head style AWG20 0 5 mm Al0 5 6WH 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 7 lists the recommended wire sizes The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using HIV single wire for 75 C at an ambient temperature of 50 C Table 2 7 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm 1 Main circuits Main circuit Nominal power input applied Inverter type L1 R L2 S L3 T Ground Inverter Braking Control motor L4 L L2 N ing output resistor circuit Sc u v wi an Power supply voltage w DCR w o DCR FRNO 1E1S 201 FRNO 2E1S 201 FRNO 4E1S 20 FRNO 75E1S 201 FRN1 5E1S 20 FRN2 2E1S 20 FRN3 7E1S 20 FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN11E1S 200 FRN15E1S 20 FRN0 4E1S 40 FRN0 75E1S 40 FRN1 5E1S 40 FRN2 2E1S 40 FRN3 7E1S 40 FRN4 0E1S 4E FRN5 5E1S 40 FRN7 5E1S 40 FRN11E1S 400 FRN15E1S 40 FRNO 1E1S 70 FRNO 2E1S 70 FRNO 4E1S 70 FRNO 75E1S 700 FRN1 5E1S 70 FRN2 2E1S 70 Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V Three phase 200 V DCR DC reactor 1 Use the terminal crimp with an insulation sheath or with processing by the insulation tube Use the insulated wire of 75 C 600 V HIV insulated This selection assumes the inverter is used in ambient temperature at 50 C 2 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is
203. l Mode Selection 2 0 Vif operation with slip compensation inactive Y 0 1 Dynamic torque vector operation 2 Vif operation with slip compensation active 3 Vif operation with optional PG interface 4 Dynamic torque vector operation with optional PG interface A15 Motor 2 No of poles 2 to 22 2 poles Yt 4 y2 A16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 kw Yt Rated 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 0 01 HP Y2 capacity of motor A17 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 oo A Y1 Rated value y2 of Fuji standard motor A18 Auto tuning 0 Disable N 0 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running A19 Online tuning 0 Disable Y 0 4 Enable A20 No load current 0 00 to 50 00 oor A Y1 Rated value y2 of Fuji standard motor A21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 0o01 Y1 Rated value y2 of Fuji standard motor A22 x 0 00 to 50 00 001 Y1 Rated value y2 of Fuji standard motor A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 0o01 Y 100 0 A24 Slip compensation response time 0 00 to 10 00 oot s Yt 0 50 A25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 00 to 10 00 0o01 Y 100 0 A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 0 01 Hz Y1 Rated value y2 of Fuji standard motor A39 Motor 2 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Yt 0 1 M
204. l for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor Onnta The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears in decimal notation on the ote keypad H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b input phase loss protection c output phase loss protection and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a style of combination Bit 0 to Bit 4 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping 277 or G4 Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise 5 63 Input phase loss protection 4 _ 7 Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7 Cnote In
205. l speed frequency PID command set b disabled y keypad 1or2 0 OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command Other than the above ON Manual speed frequency PID command currently disabled selected 9 F01 0 Link disabled LE OFF Manual speed command from keypad SS2 SS1 OFF ap IE isal Frequency setting other Hz PID ON than above o Command via link O Multi frequency command I Final frequency command PID output as frequency command _ 3 8 Settings under PID dancer control To enable the PID dancer control you need to set function code J01 to 3 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with Y and keys are different from those under the regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 the item accessible is the primary frequency command if it is set to any other data it is the PID dancer position command Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 for the details of the PID control Setting the PID dancer position command with the ao and Q keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 aie keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID command with the S Y key To enable the PID dancer posit
206. larm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 21 lists the details of the alarm information Power ON vfi List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Item Output frequenc gt Switching at approx p y 1 second intervals S 56 00 SEG JHO Item Output current Switching at approx 1 second intervals Fy a j 6 21 lt lt aH OWI Item nR Error sub code Switching at approx i 1 second intervals A J a Same as above Tu A Same as above hu E CS K e D Same as above at r teas A i Figure 3 6 Alarm Information Menu Transition 3 25 Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand L Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the A and keys to display Alarm Information 4 41 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of alarm codes
207. le to drive up to two meters with 10kQ impedance Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Pulse output Pulse monitor FMP function Pulse signal is output You can select FMP function with the slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ Pulse duty Approx 50 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Voltage waveform e Pulse output waveform TUUL o1 vmax FM output circuit Analog common Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY Table 2 9 Continued Functions Classifi cation Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and output 1 overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 and Y2 by setting function code E20 and E21 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function Codes for details Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 Y2 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 Y2 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output 2 Transistor output circuit specification lt Control circuit gt Photocoupler Current Item Ope
208. liable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt a PLC SINK sw SOURCE SOURCE On X1 to X5 X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 16 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contac ip m Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 p FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 17 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC 5 a
209. low 90 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary ON t Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but A Note also for the operation level of the current detection D Refer to the description of E34 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 M7 terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Function code data 12 E Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode 5 46 E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time for FAR2 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2 The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the Frequency arrival signal FAR comes ON After the delay time specified by E29 the Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 comes ON For details about the operation timings refer to the graph below Frequency command Change the frequency command Reference frequency 1
210. ltage or an alarm has been occurred If any of these conditions has occurred either eliminate the abnormal or error factor s and perform tuning again or contact your Fuji Electric representative If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter OFL the inverter s output Secondary circuit the result of tuning can be 4A is connected to unpredictable When you replace an inverter take note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and set those values to the new inverter s function codes 4 1 4 Test run A WARNING If the user set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions of the previous Section 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test and begin test driving of the motor ACAUTION If any abnormality is found to the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 4 Docc c rnc e c ccc aE Procedure for Test RUN 1 Turn the power ON and check that the LED mon
211. ly 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 No forward reverse operation command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source slide switch on the interface printed circuit board interface PCB is properly configured 3 No indication of rotation direction keypad operation Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 o
212. m Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to approx 90 C during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of material that can withstand temperatures of this level A WARNING Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the temperature around the inverter will tend to increase Do not install the inverter in a small e panel with poor ventilation Altitude tine rab 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them less than 5 5 kW the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the panel of your system or other dustproo
213. m 1 Voltage H51 n t Output frequency 0 Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 E Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque N Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause ote overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 orati reenter aniidae a a F05 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage
214. may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock ACAUTION Do not turn the main circuit power circuit breaker ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement A WARNING Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection Further check that the LED monitor is unlit and that the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals is lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Disposal ACAUTION Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise
215. mes When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor s resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 Input watt hour data Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Number of RS 485 errors standard Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned on
216. meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculate in the following formula m Three phase input m Single phase input Electric power W x 100 Power factor Blemic power W Power factor arin Oe hi N 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Voltage V x Current A x 100 7 6 Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit DC link bus Input primary side Output secondary side voltage P N Item Voltage Current Current Waveform Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter Ar As AT VR Vs VT Wr WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww Vv Name of meter Rectifier or Digital moving iron AC power type type meter Moving iron Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil power meter power meter power meter type Type of meter Symbol of meter Cote It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Power supply Figure 7 1 Connection of Mete
217. mulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence Err Yes Not applicable Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Multi Use them in accordance with your system requirements For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Main peripheral equipment Name of peripheral Function and application equipment Molded case MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control circuit breaker board and inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input MCCB power supply L1 L and L2 N for single phase input power supply from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by Residual current the inverter malfunctioning operated RCDs ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and on device RCDs ELCBs that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below Eo leakage Nominal Rated current of circuit breaker applied msta Inverter type MCCB and ELCB A ELCB 1 kW f RNO 1E1S 20 1 with 0 2 RNO 2E1S 20 overcurrent 0 4 RNO 4E1S 20 protection RNO 75E1S 20 RN1 5E1S 20 RN2 2E1S 20 RN3 7E1S 20 RN5 5E1S 20 RN7 5E1S 20 RN11E1S 20 RN15E1S 20 RNO 4E1S 40 RNO 75E1S 40 RN1 5E1S 40 RN2 2E1S 40 RN3 7E1S 40 RN4 0E1S 4E RN5 5E1S 40 RN7 5E1S 40 RN11E1S 40 R
218. n Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference protection Frequency Command 1 UP DOWN keys on keypad Y o Voltage input to terminal 12 410 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control DIO interface card option PG interface card option Operation Method RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by Y 2 515 terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse 25 0 to 400 0 Y Table a4 Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 400 0 ot tz N Y__ tablea 4 5 16 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 vya Y2 Table A 4 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 1 v N Y2 Table A 4 160 to 500 _Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 517 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring extemal soft start Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 Note E
219. n codes one by one checking the running status of the inverter 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Connect a molded case circuit breaker an earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 The power for the control PCB did not reach a high enough level Check if the short bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is poor contact between the short bar and the terminals gt Connect the short bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P or retighten the screws 6 8 Possible Causes 3 The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter Check and Measures Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with anot
220. n the alarm occurred gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Reset the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 4 or 5 depending on the load 2 The power to the inverter was switched back on too soon with F14 1 Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its control PCB was still operating Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the range of the inverter s specifications Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications 6 12 Possible Causes 4 Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage to find where the peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections 5 Other loads were connected to the same power supply and required a lar
221. n via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm 4 Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays Er Yes check 4 45 on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run function command is present when Powering up An alarm is released the key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters if the tuning has failed or has 7 Yes detection aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network via Eri Yes communications the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code 4 4 Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the Ere Yes during under undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm voltage code RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network via ErP Yes communications an optional RS 485 communications card detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an optional error code Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically r
222. n winter the load tends to increase 5 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 6 An external frequency command is being used Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 7 In torque limit operation the acceleration deceleration is suppressed Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque switching signal TL2 TL1 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default gt Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command TL2 TL1 gt Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 8 Any acceleration deceleration time is invalidly set The terminal command RT1 switching between the acceleration deceleration time 2 and 1 turns ON OFF invalidly gt Turn the RT1 ON OFF validly For reference if RT1 is ON the acceler
223. nal cooling attachment option for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 kW or above In an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust however do not use external cooling in an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust which tends to clog the heat sink LL For details refer to the Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 E1 Installation Manual INR SI47 0880a External heat radiation 70 Internal heat EN radiation T 30 Cooling fans Internal fans Internal Heat temperature sink of the panel Max 50 C Internal air intake External air intake _ Equipment panel Figure 2 2 External Cooling ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident 2 2 3 Mounting direction Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it securely with four screws or bolts so that the logo FRENIC Multi can be seen from the front Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run 4 Solving abnormal vibration after installation If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration
224. ndervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops ii Yes protection below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for three phase 200 V 400 VDC for three phase 400 V class series However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This Lan Yes loss protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running OL Yes loss protection and during running stopping the inverter output Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink GH i Yes protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to ch Yes overheating of an external braking resistor Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking resistor 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 11 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Chil Yes protection Transis
225. ng capability and allowable average loss va ues listed below respectively Braking resistor Continuous braking 100 braking torque Intermittent braking Period Less than 1 any Inverter type Resistance s pply yp Q Discharging Braking Allowable voltage 7 average Duty Type Qty capability time loss ED kWs s kW NOSES SE o 7 a7 DB0 75 2 100 FRNO 4E1S 20 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1S 20 17 45 0 068 18 Three FRNI5E1S 20 444 i 34 0 075 10 phase FRN2 2E1S 20 33 30 0 077 7 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 DB3 7 2 33 37 30 0 093 FRN5 5E1S 20 DB5 5 2 20 55 0 138 FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRN11E1S 20 DB11 2 10 55 10 0 275 FRN15E1S 20 DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNO 4E1S 044 22 0 4E1S 40_ Dao 754 200 S i FRNO 75E1S 40 17 45 0 068 18 FRN1 1 07 1 5E1840 aoa iat 34 0 075 0 FRN2 2E1S 40 33 30 0 077 7 Three M ERN3 7E15 40 prase FRN4 0E1S 4E DB3 7 4 130 37 20 0 093 FRN5 5E1S 40 DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 5 FRN11E1S 40 DB11 4 40 55 10 0 275 FRN15E1S 40 DB15 4 34 4 75 0 375 FRNO 1E1S 70 ae 90 0 037 37 Single FRNO 2E1S 70 1 07 5 ie 9 phase FRNO 4E1S 70 0 044 22 200 V FRNO 75E1S 70 17 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1S 07 1 SEIS7O pao F 34 0 075 0 FRN2 2E1S 70 33 30 0 077 7 The FR
226. ng length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply primary lines if it is more than 20 m insert it to the power output Secondary lines of the inverter AC Reactor ACR e This optional feature must be connected to the primary side commercial power supply side of the inverter when the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply is 2 to 3 Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V In case the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply exceeds 3 you would need to take other measures such as increasing the capacity of the inverter Contact your Fuji Electric representative e Ina DC link bus system using terminals P and N the AC reactor protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current 67 Voltage unbalance Braking resistors DBRs A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter 9 3 Name of option Function and application Options for Operation and Communications External potentiometer for frequency commands An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter Multi function
227. ning mode Running status information e g output Monitor frequency current and voltage m In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data m In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode m n Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode m In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with and v keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators RUN LED Table 3 1 Continued Functio
228. ns Lights when any run command to the inverter is active KEYPAD CONTROL LED Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the uN key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights LED Indicators Unit and mode expression by the three LED indicators Simultaneous keying The three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit kW A Hz r min and m min Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Multi supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression fo N keys stands for pressing the N key while holding down the 60 key Table 3 2 Simultaneous Keying Operation mode Simultaneous keying Used to Programming Gro A keys Change certain function code data Refer to codes F00 H03 and H97 in Chapter 5 mode Gro v keys FUNCTION CODES Alarm mode Goa keys Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms currently occurred 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENI
229. nt software or make the no response error detection time be ignored y08 y18 0 g Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defective software hardware Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware amp Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate Broken communications cable or poor contact G Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable 6 21 Possible Causes 6 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter 7 The RS 485 communications card malfunctioned gt Replace the RS 485 communications card option 20 amp F Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value fo
230. ntering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring extemal soft start Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 or yY Y Depending 5 18 percentage with respect to F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 on the Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 1 3 or 4 inverter capacity Electronic Thermal Overload T Fora general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan v Y 1 520 Protection for Motor 1 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics ___ separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable oo Al yY y1 100 of the 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the Y2 motorrated motor current F12 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 oi min Y Y 5 0 Restart Mode after Momentary Power 0 Disable restart Trip immediately f F Y Tableava 523 Failure 1 Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Mode selection 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occured for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load F15 Frequency Limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 ot e yY Y 70 0 526 Low 0 0 to 400 0 ot tz y Y 0 0 Figs Bias Frequency command 1 _ 100 00 to 100 00 1 0 01 Y Y 0 00 5 27 F20 DC Braking 1 0 0 t0 60 0 ot re Y Y 0 0 528 Braking starting frequency F21 Braking level 0 to 100 1 ely Y o F22 Braking time 0 00 D
231. o Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or more orders of class gt Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 or A20 A21 and A22 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 5 The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 CQ For details of tuning errors refer to Errors during Tuning in Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 19 amp amp RS 485 communications error E P RS 485 communications error Option card Problem Acommunications error occurred during RS 485 communications Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 to y20 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ BS Even though no response error detection time y08 y18 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipme
232. o a If no LE is assigned the command source selected RS 485 communications link by H30 y98 will apply Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 Via RS 485 communications link Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Via field bus option Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP Command sources specified by H30 Mode selection Data for H30 Frequency command Inverter itself F01 C30 Run command Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications li standard Inverter itself F02 Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications li standard Via RS 485 communications li standard Via RS 485 communications li standard Via RS 485 communications li option card Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications li option card Via RS 485 communications li standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications li option card Via RS 485 communications li standard Via RS 485 communications li option card Via RS 485 communications li opt
233. o not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 when you assign the terminal C1 to C1 function Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Analog input Shielded wire lt Control circuit gt External device Capacitor lt Control circuit gt analog output 0 022 uF 13 50V a P caa 12 12 1 I L T i 1 m1 11 1 Potentiometer V Fira core 1kto5kQ Pass the same phase wires through or tum them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 13 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 14 Example of Electric Noise Reduction X1 Digital 1 Various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment input and multi frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to R X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and X2 Digi E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function inpu Codes X3 Digi Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the internal slide inpu switch Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X5 X4 Digi FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the inpu normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa sa Digi a 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for input
234. operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation E Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Running states that enable the current limiter Data for F43 During acceleration Disable During constant speed Disable During deceleration Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable E Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating Zn Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it vote may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time e If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting e The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor F50 F51 Discharging capability and Allowable av
235. otor characteristics 1 HP rating motors y2 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors A40 Slip Compensation 2 0 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 0 Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above A41 Output Current Fluctuation 0 00 to 0 40 oor Y 0 20 Damping Gain for Motor 2 A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 Change or reset the cumulative data N A46 Startup Times of Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup times N Refer to page J codes Application Functions Incre Code Name Data setting range nere Unit when ment copying setting page Data Default Refer to J01 PID Control Mode selection 0 Disable 0 Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control J02 Remote command SV 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad 0 PID command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control Command via communications link J03 P Gain 0 000 to 30 000 1 0 100 J04 1 Integral time 0 0 J05 D Differential time 0 00 J06 Feedback filter 0 5 J10_ PID Control Anti reset windup 200 Jn Select alarm output Absolute value
236. ou set a lower value than the current one for F09 and A05 gt Lower the value for torque boost F09 and A05 if the motor is not going to stall 5 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 gt Enable current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 and F41 gt Raise the inverter capacity 6 Malfunction caused by noise 2 Gn Overvoltage Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage Chi i Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration hic Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration cid Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The power supply voltage was over the range of the inverter s specifications What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within
237. ould be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not m Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 E Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 m Current detected and Current detected 2 ID and ID2 Function code data 37 38 The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level or E37 Current detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops be
238. ount machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load 5 59 H28 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance va Hz Droop characteristics Speed Output frequency Reference frequency e Output frequency cae AT Load 100 Motor load torque Note To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor H30 Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or field bus option allows you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or field bus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the field bus LE OFF H30 y98 Lgi Inverter itself i ae Selected command QO OO Frequency command 1 i ON Run command Standard RJ 45 RS 485 communications link o Option card Field bus ___ 777 Option e
239. output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed Power Power 5 mor less a ASA oe input input i Output circuit filter Inverter Inverter 50 m or less 400 m or less Cote Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter s output lines Secondary circuit e If the wiring length is long the stray capacitance between the wires will increase resulting in an outflow of the leakage current It will activate the overcurrent protection increase the leakage current or will not assure the accuracy of the current display In the worst case the inverter could be damaged If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors 2 12 Cnote Driving 400 V class series motor gt Ifa thermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect the motor from overheating the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring length shorter than 50 m In this situation add an output circuit filter option or lower the carrier frequency Function code F26 e If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of t
240. over fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover put your thumbs on the handles of the main circuit terminal block cover and push it up while supporting it with your fingers Refer to Figure 2 5 Terminal cover fixing screw pur SS We Main circuit 7 i terminal block cover Figure 2 5 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the Note inverter Main circuit terminal block cover Figure 2 6 Mounting the main circuit terminal block cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW 2 5 3 For inverters with a capacity of 11 and 15 kW To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold the handles on the both sides of the main circuit terminal block cover and pull it up Terminal cover Terminal cover fixing screw PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Handles Figure 2 7 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the Note inverter
241. p That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Base frequency Above the base or below frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable Data for H68 Accl Decel Constant speed E Dynamic torque vector contro To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation Using the PG feedback speed control at same time however also disables the slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy E PG speed feedback control PG interface This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator PG interface card It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high accur
242. provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur F23 F24 F39 Starting Frequency 1 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop Frequency Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output Note any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting _ gt lt gt Stop frequency 1 1 1 1 1 frequency H i 1 F25 F23 eer Time Inverter Out of running A Out of running running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF gt Time F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and tone m Motor sound Carrier f
243. r 3 4 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command 5 Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped While referring to the block diagram of the drive command block check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command The frequency command was set below the starting or stop frequency Check that a frequency command has been entered with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Set the value of the frequency command to the same or higher than that of the starting or stop frequency F23 or F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the frequency command signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 6 2 Possible Causes 7 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active
244. r characteristics of Cote Fuji n 8 series 3 e The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 H03 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters 7 7 To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the keys or Y keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization P01 P03 P06 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A15 A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 PO2 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Motor Rated capacity 2 P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection 3 HO03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor par
245. r momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Description Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Trip immediately undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Trip after recovery undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power from power failure failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm Z is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power frequency at which the failure the inverter saves the output frequency being power failure occurred applied at that time and shuts down the output so that for general loads the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast
246. r the timer operation which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF Possible Causes 1 The voltage fed to the control PCB dropped suddenly while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF because the DC link bus was rapidly discharged What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus electricity After pressing the key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer driven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF back to the original values and then restart the operation 8 A high intensity noise affected the operation of the inverter while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Pad gt Improve noise control After pressing the gt key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer dr
247. r vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa in storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 2 3 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent in
248. racteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Nominal applied motor A Output current Output frequency for Characteristic Thermal tim 3 fas erma ume for setting the motor characteristic factor factor nstan constant 7 thermal time Factory default kW constant Imax fe at a2 a3 0 1 to 0 75 1 5 to 3 7 Rated current x 150 5 5 to 11 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Nominal Output current Output frequency for Characteristic applied Thermal time for setting the motor characteristic factor factor motor constant r thermal time kW Factory default constant Imax Base Base R rren 0 1 to 22 areo current frequency frequency 1 O slg x 33 x 33 m Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable 5 21 E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specifie
249. ration ON level voltage OFF level Maximum motor current at ON Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 18 Transistor Output Circuit Figure 2 19 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC N When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a uote surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals e When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case 5 2 fo fe 2 2 a c em Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s common Connecting Programmable Logic Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 or Y2 Figure 2 19 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for output lt Control circuit gt Z Programmable lt Control circuit gt lt Programmal logic controller logic control Photocoupler Current T 24 VDC vayry2
250. red digit and change the data in higher digits By setting function code C30 to 0 keys on keypad and selecting frequency command 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the N V key You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items motor speed load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 5 or 6 as listed in Table 3 3 3 6 m Settings under PID process control To enable the PID process control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with Y and Y keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can access manual speed commands frequency command with N and V keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys 4 Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 for the details of the PID control Setting the PID process command with the iS and Q keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 N Y keys on keypad 2 Setthe LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the S key
251. ree phase FRN1 5E1S 20 200 V FRN2 2E1S 20 150 86 Three phase FRN1 5E1S 40 64 400 V FRN2 2E1S 40 Single phase pay FRN1 5E1S 70 160 96 Main nameplate Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 Three phase 400 V FRN3 7E1S 40 FRN4 0E1S 4E Single phase 200 V FRN2 2E1S 70 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K BADDI PODOJOG Unit mm Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 200 V FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 Three phase 400 V FRNS 5E1S 40 FRN7 5E1S 40 195 Main nameplate 12 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 200 V FRN11E1S 20 FRN15E1S 20 Three phase 400 V FRN11E1S 40 FRN55E1S 40 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on t
252. reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 If you need to change the frequency command press the N Y key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned on next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency C Tip If you have set function code F01 to 0 V keys on keypad but have selected a Z frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then the and V keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the V key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the 6Y V key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the V key holding down the key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desi
253. requency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output Secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz Motor sound noise emission High lt gt Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High lt gt Low Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt gt High Inverter loss Low lt gt High 5 29 Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a Chote large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm IU II Lil Li With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F27 c
254. rminals and grounding terminals 2 10 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad A 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for CONNECTION cece eee 2 24 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps 2 25 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 0 00 2 27 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes 3 3 Running Mode eee 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup 3 13 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 3 15 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking 3 16 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 16 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking 3 19 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 3 5 Alarm Mode Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test we A 4 1 1 Insp
255. rn factory default boos Variable torque V f Torque pattern boos E V f characteristics The FRENIC Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V 100 Rated voltage Output frequenc Hy Torque t boost g Bese i requenc FOD 4 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 5 18 Output voltage V 100 Rated voltage me Fea se eo ees ee f Torque Output boost fo i frequency Base Hz frequency 1 F04 Linear V f pattern F37 1 Ti When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage p i aie may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Constant torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern Vif patte
256. rs 7 7 7 5 Insulation Test Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment avoid a Megger test If a Megger test is unavoidable follow the procedure below Because a wrong test procedure will cause breakage of the inverter take sufficient care A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test procedure is wrong When the dielectric strength test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement 2 Ifthe test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the control wiring 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 5MQ 1 MQ for the EMC filter built in type of inverters or a larger value displayed at the Megger indicates a correct state The value is for a discrete inverter Inverter L1 R L2 S L3 T P4 P t N U v w RO TO Megger Figure 7 2 Megger Test 2 Dielectric strength test of control circuit Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit Prepare a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform
257. rs from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter Other options Panel mount FRENIC Multi series of inverters can be installed to your system panel or adapter equipment using mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters of FVR E11S series Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 and 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 3 7 kW Single phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 4 and 2 2 kW Mounting adapter This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC Multi series of inverters on the for external panel in such a way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the cooling outside Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your panel Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 15 kW High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi Instruction manual First Edition March 2006 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments reg
258. rting Mode Auto search and Delay time H09 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and every normal startup The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Frequency command i i Motor speed 7 i 1 i H 1 Starting mode i I Delay time 1 1 H49 1 i i 7 Max 1 2 sec i Iding motor speed oft aA presumed i 1 1 Auto search for idling motor speed to follow 5 57 E H09 and STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of H09 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data
259. rto ment copying setting page 29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time 0 10 5 47 E30 Frequency Arrival 25 Hysteresis width E31 Frequency Detection FDT Table A 4 Detection level E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 400 0 1 0 E34 Overload Early Waming Curent 100 of the 5 47 Detection motor rated Level 0 00 Disable current Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current E35 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 1 10 00 E37 Current Detection 2 Level 0 00 Disable 100 of the Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current motor rated current E38 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 1 10 00 E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 5 48 Time E40_ PID Display Coefficient A 999 to 0 00 to 9990 1 100 E41_ PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 9990 1 0 00 E42_ LED Display Filter 10 0 to 5 0 0 5 E43 LED Monitor Item selection 0 Speed monitor select by E48 0 3 Output current 4 Output voltage Calculated torque Input power PID command PID feedback amount Timer PID output Load factor Motor output Reserved 2 Reserved 2 E45 LCD Monitor 3 Item selection Running status rotational direction and operation guide 0 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection Japanese Table A 4 English German French Spanish Italian E47 Contrast control f0 Low to 10 High 5 48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item Output frequency Before slip compensation 0 Output fr
260. rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level In running special motors High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for brake must be supplied from the primary circuit If the power supply for brake is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with ser
261. s If H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 e If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor gt a When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the Note reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 accordingly Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 A12 and F15 gt F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C50 Bias for Frequency 1 Bias base point C32 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain base point C37 C39 Analog Input Adjustment C1 Gain gain base point C42 C44 Analog Input Adjustment V2 Gain gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the g
262. s A15 Iq LIIL Load shaft speed mHz mA OkW r min Output frequency Hz x E50 IWW Line speed TINA OHz mA BkW m min Output frequency Hz x E50 Constant feeding rate time OHz OA OkwW E50 Output frequency Hz x E39 Output current OHz mA Okw Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 cL OHz OA OkW Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Calculated torque OHz OA Okw Motor output torque in Calculated value OHz OA skw Input power 3 4 Input power to the inverter Table 3 3 Continued Display sample on LED indicator Meani F diaplayed val Function the LED m on O off eaning of displayed value code E43 monitor 1 Monitor items PID command II PID command feedback amount 3 4 MANALI transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be PID feedback Sah controlled e g temperature amount oc a a Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details Timer f Remaining time of timer opera Timer operation 3 tion PID output in as the 2 maximum frequenc F03 PID output 3 4 GEL being at 100 i yori For motor 2 read F03 as A01 Load factor of the motor in as 6 pi Loaditactor the rated output being at 100 Motor output 7 FA Motor output in kW 1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so E 3 app
263. s below 20 C are displayed as 20 C pest afective output current Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Unit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Cumulative run time of the cooling fan Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled but the fan does not run Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 LED Monitor shows Number of startups Table 3 20 Continued Description Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 ti
264. s is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added to frequency command 1 F01 It is never added to frequency command 2 multi frequency command or other frequency commands This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added Auxiliary frequency command 2 to all frequency commands including frequency command 1 frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured This input includes the feedback of the temperature or pressure under the PID control PID command 1 PID feedback amount Cnote If these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is wr given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command entered through terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken
265. s of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays Overcurrent protection 0 or OEI Motor overheated GY Overvoltage protection i Liki or LLII Motor overloaded GL i or fie WI I Heat sink overheated LH i Inverter overloaded E Number of reset times H04 H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated AWARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below lt Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 gt Alarm factor Protective function Tripped state Reset command Inverter output frequency Auto reset signal TRY Alarm output for any alarm
266. s to the motor are too long and caused a large amount of current to leak from them S 12 Memory error Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 While the inverter was writing data especially initializing data or copying data power supply was turned OFF and the voltage for the control PCB dropped What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if pressing the key resets the alarm after the function code data are initialized by setting the data of H03 to 1 Return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter while data especially initializing data was being written Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Improve noise control Alternatively return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 3 The control PCB failed Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representat
267. sed the fun key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV The motor did not start Possible Causes 1 The voltage of the DC link bus was low What to Check and Suggested Measures Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode on the keypad and check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 3 Jappears Problem Parentheses 3 has appeared on the LED monitor while the keypad displaying the Drive Monitor Possible Causes 1 The data to be displayed could not fit the LED monitor e g overflown What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 does not exceed 9999 gt Adjust the setting of E50 6 24 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time Take care of the following items during work A WARNING e Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage
268. selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to run v Y 0 5 26 1 Ifthe output frequency lowers less than the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low oa e y Y 16 H code continued Change Code Name Data setting range haa Unit wa Pate erie Reet ment copying setting page H68 Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 0 5 32 Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above H69 Automatic Deceleration Disable 0 5 62 Mode selection Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enable Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 H70 Overload Prevention Control 10 00 Follow deceleration time specified by FO8 E11 999 5 63 0 01 to 100 0 999 Disable H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0 Disable 0 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment 5 0 5 62 limit for braking H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 20 Gain for Motor 1 H89_ Reserved 2 o H90_ Reserved 2 o H91_ Reserved 2 o H94 Cumulative Motor Run Tim
269. shipping destination 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 2 1 Protective structure General specifications of keypad Table 8 1 General Specifications Specification Front side IP40 Back mounting side IP20 Remarks Site to be installed In door Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed Ambient air No corrosive gas no inflammable gas no dust and no direct sunlight allowed Altitude 1000 m or less Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration Within 2 to 9 Hz Within 9 to 20 Hz Within 20 to 55 Hz Within 55 to 200 Hz 3 mm maximum amplitude 9 8 m s 2 mis 1 mis Storage ambient temperature 25 to 70 C Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed External dimension Refer to Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad Mass 35 grams With a keypad rear cover Note When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 1000 m to 3000 m you need to lower the output current of the inverter For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad No of linkable unit Table 8 2 Hardware specifications Specification One to one connection with an inverter Remarks For a remote site operation Link cable US ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight
270. side the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70 If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control panel at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverter to a motor or run the motor Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Item Specifications Site location Indoors Ambient 10 to 50 C Note 1 temperature Relative 5 to 95 No condensation humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Note 2 The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa pressure Vibration 3 m
271. stop EA This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop EA This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E20 E21 Terminal Y1 and Y2 Function E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 E21 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 and 80A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately
272. t Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV 25 to 6000 FMP Pulse rate at 100 output 1440 Refer to page 5 30 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 0 Variable torque load 1 Constant torque load 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC 5 18 F39 Stop Frequency Holding Time 10 00 to 10 00 0 00 5 29 F40 F41 F42 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for driving Limiting level for braking Control Mode Selection 1 20 to 200 1999 Disable 20 to 200 1999 Disable 0 Vif control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control Vif control with slip compensation active Vif control with optional PG interface 999 999 5 31 5 32 F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level Disable No current limiter works Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC 1 2 3 4 Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface 0 1 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output
273. t F09 and A05 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 A02 and A03 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting the motor 2 or 1 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify function codes to match the connected motor Check whether the frequency command signal is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor 13 Miss poor connection of the DC reactor DCR Check the wiring gt Connect the DC reactor correctly Repair or replace wires for the DC reactor 6 3 Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F03 and A01 frequency gt Readijust the data of F03 and A01 Maximum The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter high gt Readijust the data of F15 The reference frequency currently specified was too low Check the signals for the frequency command from the analog input terminals with Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad g
274. t Increase the frequency of the command gt If an external potentiometer for frequency command signal converter switches or relay contacts are malfunctioning replace them gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 correctly A frequency command e g multi frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g cancel higher priority run commands etc The acceleration time was too long Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration deceleration time to match the load 6 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the pump In winter the load tends to increase Check if mechanical brake is working gt Release the mechanical brake 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor In case auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether P02 P03 P06 P07 and P08 A16 A17
275. t Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45 Startup Times of Motor H44 A46 5 40 Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes before use Related function Functions Restrictions codes Non linear V f pattern Disabled Linear V f pattern only H50 to H53 Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not supported F24 Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not supported F39 Overload early warning Disabled E34 and E35 Droop control Disabled H28 UP DOWN control Disabled Fixed at default setting 0 H61 PID control Disabled J01 Braking signal Disabled J68 to J72 Software current limiter Disabled F43 and F44 Rotation direction limitation Disabled H08 Overload stop Disabled J63 to J67 Cnote To run motor 2 with the M2 M1 terminal command and a run command e g FWD ALLT the input of the M2 M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms motor 1 will be driven by default m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1
276. ter changing the function code data gt Press the S key after changing the function code data G The setting data of function code F02 E01 through E05 E98 and E99 could not be changed The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are concurrently turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 9 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor m Quick reference table of alarm codes sy Name Refer to Refer to mW L Electronic thermal overload alarm 1 AEE Electronic thermal overload alarm 2 ore Instantaneous overcurrent 6 10 EEE ie Memory error CHS i Keypad communications error Lic Overvoltage 6 11 CPU error id Option card communications error LLI Undervoltage 6 12 Option card error L m Input phase loss 6 13 Operation protection LiF Output phase loss 6 14 Tuning error on RS 485 communications error Limi i Heat sink overheat 6 14 RS 485 communications error Option card ruiz Alarm issued by an external Data saving error during IE device Grip undervoltage m Motor protection Litt PTC thermistor 6 15 Hardware error cit Braking resistor overheated 6 16 Mock alarm 1 lt n Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level ci Overcurrent occurred during acceleration LL Overcurrent occurred during deceleration a Overcurrent occurred when running at
277. the equipment 1 Check visually or measure using apparatus 2 Visual inspection 1 The standard specification must be satisfied 2 No foreign or dangerous objects are left Voltage Check if the voltages of the main and control circuit are correct 7 1 Measure the voltages using a multimeter or the like The standard specification must be satisfied Check part Table 7 1 Continued Check item 1 Check if the display is clear 2 Check if there is missing parts in the characters How to inspect 1 2 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 The display can be read and there is no fault Structure such as frame and cover 1 Abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Loosen bolts tightened parts 3 Deformation and breakage 4 Discoloration and deformation caused by overheat 5 Check for foulness and dust 1 Visual or hearing inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No abnormalities Common 1 Check if bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for foulness and dust 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 3 No abnormalities Conductor and wire 1 Check the conductor for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of
278. the output circuit filter OFL vii Discontinuance of power capacitor for power factor correction Do not mount power capacitors for power factor correction in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to correct the inverter power factor Do not use power capacitors for power factor correction in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Combina tion with A Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to peripheral Reducing noise satisfy EMC Directive devices A 7 A If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or c operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge Measures against current is generated by open close of the power capacitor for surge currents power factor correction in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use Megger test a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test TREAS When using remote control limit the wiring length between Gontro Greu the inverter and operator panel to 20 m or less and use g teng twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the Wiring length inverter will
279. ther If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually m Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Some signals cannot switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 using any of function codes E01 through E05 Function code data BX 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF 5 12 5 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Multi series of inv
280. tics parameters such as capacity of the motor H codes H03 to H98 High performance functions Highly added value functions Functions for sophisticated control Acodes A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor J codes J01 to J86 Application functions Functions for applications such as PID control y codes y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication o codes 027 to 059 Optional functions Functions for options Note Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables Gi Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to IP Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults initialize the whole data using function code H03 data 1 Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Pow
281. tions 8 3 1 Terminal functions Vind 8 3 2 Running the inverter with keypad 8 5 8 3 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models 8 4 2 Standard keypad 8 5 Protective Functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS niont 9 1 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package Cooling fan fixing screws for inverters of 5 5 to 15 kW Keypad rear cover with fixing screws e Instruction manual this manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model you ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the following page DOJ FRNS S5SE1S 2A 0 On TYPE FRN5 5E1S 2A 1min aim 523710K1208 Fuji Electric FA a Main Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates b Sub Nameplate TYPE Type of inverter Code Series name Code Shipping destination FRN FRENIC series Instruction manual version Code Nominal applied motor 0 1 0 1 kW 0 2 0 2 kW 0 4 0 4 kW 0 75 0 75 kW A Asia English C China Chinese E EU English J Japan Japanese K Taiwan and Korea English od e Powersupply voltage
282. to 21 99 18 5 67 0 21 4 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 22 78 0 25 1 2 70 16 00 0 90 Motor capacity kW 400 V class series Example for FRN__ _E100 DJ Nominal Rated No load R 4X Rated slip applied current current frequency motor A A Hz P02 A16 w P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 53 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 83 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 15 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 51 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 60 2 43 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 50 3 84 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 5 5 50 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 75 14 5 6 25 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 0 8 85 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 5 10 0 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 34 0 10 7 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 22 39 0 12 6 2 70 16 00 0 90 Motor capacity kW H04 HO5 Auto reset Times and Reset interval H04 and HO5 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in exces
283. to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 13 Table 3 14 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 15 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Table 3 13 Running Status Bit Assignment Notation Content 1 when function code data is being written Notation Content 1 under voltage limiting control Always 0 1 under torque limiting control Always 0 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands via communications link 1 during braking 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction LED No 1 under current limiting control LE 1 during running in the forward direction Bit 10 Notation DEC Binary 0 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 Hexadecimal expression LED3 LED2 LED1 A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 15 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Binary Table 3 15 Binary and Hexadecimal
284. to the cooling fans or the keypad fix them firmly using the fixing screws provided as accessories E Fixing the cooling fans Table 2 3 Fixing Screws Power supply voltage Nominal f Screws applied Inverter Screw Tightening motor type size torque kW accessory N m Cooling fans r FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN11E1S 20 FRN15E1S 20 FRNS5 5E1S 40 FRN7 5E1S 40 FRN11E1S 40 FRN15E1S 40 x Figure 2 3 Fixing the Cooling Fans Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 2 3 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover 1 For inverters with a capacity of less than 5 5 kW To remove the terminal cover put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you 2 To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold its right and left ends with your fingers and slide it toward you Terminal cover PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Figure 2 4 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of Less Than 5 5 kW 2 4 2 For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal c
285. tor IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External alarm Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital hie Yes input input signal THR Electronic In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to tht Yes thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal he overload overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range F10 2 The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by 2 F11 and F12 fe a For motor 2 read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08 2 PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor cy Yes thermistor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals C1 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB accordingly Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the early inverter is stopped by the electronic thermal overload warning protection for the motor Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay conta
286. type Extension cable for the remote site operation CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S and etc Maximum cable length 20m Connector Pin number Standard RJ 45 connector jack Table 8 3 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Connector Description Refer to Table 8 3 Remarks 1 and 8 Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC 2 and 7 Reference potential OV 3 and 6 Reserved 4 RS 485 communications data line 5 RS 485 communications data line 8 4 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 and Section 2 3 6 Table 2 9 respectively 8 3 2 Running the inverter with keypad Note 1 DCR i Note 2 MCCB or Power ELCB Three phase x single phase 200 to 240 V x 50 60 Hz or three phase 2 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Grounding ake c 13 1112 11 pct 11 FM Meter FM FWD REV CM MCCB Molded case circuit breaker j Xt ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker x2 MC Magnetic contactor x3 DCR DC reactor peel DBR Braking resistor I CM Note 1 Note 2 l1 P1 A sw3 c PTC SW8 ct 4 SW7 v2 FMA 120c 308 30130A FMP SW6 Y1 Y2 sink CMY SOURCE sw RS 485 port option PLC CM Loe THR Note 4 Grounding terminal Control circuit Alarm output for any fault Tr
287. ult Input termina command Acceleration deceleration time OFF Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 ON Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the terminals between HLD and CM i e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLDis not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output frequency m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run an ae an rT L Min 10ms Reset alarm m Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command
288. using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter For details of auto tuning refer to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data P05 Motor 1 Online tuning The primary and secondary resistances R1 and R2 will change as the motor temperature rises P05 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation online P06 P07 Te P08 P12 Motor 1 No load current R1 X and Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters E No load current P06 Enter the
289. val signal FAR Y 99 2 1002 Frequency detected FDT 3 1003 Undenoltage detected Lu Inverter stopped 4 1004 Torque polarity detected BD 5 1005 Inverter output limiting UOL 6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary IPF power failure 7 1007 Motor overload early waming COL 10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 21 1021 Frequency anival signal 2 FAR2 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay 10L2 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early waming 0H 30 1030 Senice lifetime alarm LIFE 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 37 1037 Curent detected io 38 1038 Current detected 2 D2 42 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 49 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 57 1057 Brake signal BRKS 80 1080 Reserved 2 81 1081 Reserved 2 82 1082 Reserved 2 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 3 E code continued Change oes e eee mere i is Data Default Refe
290. ve compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor to be used Data for P99 Motor type Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete P03 P06 P07 and P08 data and the old related internal data are automatically updated For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type P99 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard P99 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard P99 4 Other motors Other manufacturer s or unknown motors If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the moto
291. verter capacity A06 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 1 for Motor 2 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan A07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y1 100 of the 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the Y2 motor rated current A08 Thermal time constant 5 0 A09 DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency 0 0 A10 Braking level 0 A11 Braking time 0 00 A12 Starting Frequency 2 0 5 A13 Load Selection Variable torque load 1 Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 5 11 5 8 A code continued 5 9 Incre Data Default Code Name Data setting range Unit ment copying setting A14 Contro
292. verter outputs Connect a three phase motor P1 P DC reactor Connect an optional DC reactor DCR for improving power connection factor P DB DC braking resistor Connect an optional braking resistor P N DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals Sc Grounding for Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and inverter and motor motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter Figure 2 9 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment l Wiring procedure Grounding terminals G Inverter output terminals U V W and G DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P DC braking resistor connection terminals P DB DC link bus terminals P and N Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N ie Perform wiring as necessary E g FRNO 75E1S 2A Other inverter s Power supply Cote Do not connect more than 2 wires to the Molded case terminal P Circuit breaker or Residual current operated protective device RCD Earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection Other
293. verter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration Cinta Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the Note base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 F10 F11 F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter F10 selects the motor cooling mech
294. which the cooling fan has run The display is in units of 1000 hours The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 and the relay contact terminals 30A B C as soon as any of the conditions listed under the Judgment level column has been exceeded When the replacement data of any parts exceeds the judgment level this signal comes ON Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting Electrolytic capacitors on the 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time printed circuit boards estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load Cooling fan 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit include harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the
295. wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command Cnote Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command The KNot abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the Reference loss detected signal REF OFF to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 100 or higher the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 1 The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 5 49 C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the N Y keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function Disable timer operation Enable timer operation C Tip e Pressing the g key during timer countdown quits the timer operation Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the fun key Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation
296. y power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter of the current limit control block shown in FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 Section 4 4 Figure 4 3 1 The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter g Ifthe frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the Note motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High and Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follow
297. ypad Enables 7 amp keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the forward rotation Forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Reverse rotation A When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV vote terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate e In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided F03 Maximum Frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment ACAUTION The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Samsung Galaxy S Advance 1-800-4-DEWALT • www.dewalt.com Manual - DeVilbiss Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file